Collaboration Projects

Release 4.5 SP05

HELP.EPPLMCPRO

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Copyright
© Copyright 2008 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z10, System z9, z10, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer, z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER5+, POWER5, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. SAP, R/3, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP Business ByDesign, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

Collaboration Projects

2

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Icons in Body Text
Icon Meaning Caution Example Note Recommendation Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types of information at a glance. For more information, see Help on Help General Information Classes and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of any version of SAP Library.

Typographic Conventions
Type Style Example text Description Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options. Cross-references to other documentation. Example text EXAMPLE TEXT Emphasized words or phrases in body text, graphic titles, and table titles. Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE. Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and database tools. Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation. Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system. Keys on the keyboard, for example, F2 or ENTER.

Example text

Example text <Example text>

EXAMPLE TEXT

Collaboration Projects

3

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Collaboration Projects ......................................................................................................... 10 Work with cProjects ......................................................................................................... 10 Navigation .................................................................................................................... 10 Adjustment or Enhancement of the User Interface ........................................................ 11 Personalization of the User Interface......................................................................... 11 Project Elements .......................................................................................................... 12 Project Definition....................................................................................................... 12 Project Roles ............................................................................................................ 13 Phase ....................................................................................................................... 14 Checklist................................................................................................................... 14 Checklist Item........................................................................................................ 15 Task ......................................................................................................................... 15 Typical Functions for Project Leads .............................................................................. 15 Typical Functions for Project Participants ..................................................................... 16 Typical Functions for Project Resource Planners .......................................................... 16 Typical Functions for Decision Makers.......................................................................... 16 Functions on the Start Page............................................................................................. 17 Opening a Project or Project Version ............................................................................ 17 Creating a Project Definition ......................................................................................... 18 Creating a Project Charter for a Project Definition......................................................... 19 Dashboard ................................................................................................................... 20 Favorites List................................................................................................................ 24 Adding Objects to the Favorites List .......................................................................... 24 Project List ................................................................................................................... 25 Search Function ........................................................................................................... 26 Vacant Role Search ..................................................................................................... 27 Selection by Qualification .......................................................................................... 28 Making User Settings ................................................................................................... 28 Creation of a Project ........................................................................................................ 30 Creating a Project Definition ......................................................................................... 31 Creating Project Elements ............................................................................................ 32 Deactivation of Object Types ........................................................................................ 34 Task Hierarchies .......................................................................................................... 34 Mass Data Entry........................................................................................................... 35 Templates .................................................................................................................... 36 Creating a Template ................................................................................................. 36 Work with Checklist References................................................................................ 40 Including Subtrees from Templates ........................................................................... 41 Structure Tree .............................................................................................................. 41 Collaboration Projects 4

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Creation of Data for the Project Definition ..................................................................... 42 Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition............................................................... 43 Creating Additional Data for a Project Definition ........................................................ 44 Creation of Data for a Phase ........................................................................................ 46 Creating Basic Data for a Phase ............................................................................... 46 Creating Additional Data for a Phase......................................................................... 48 Creating Data for a Checklist ........................................................................................ 48 Creating Basic Data for a Checklist ........................................................................... 49 Creating Additional Data for a Checklist .................................................................... 50 Creating Data for a Checklist Item ................................................................................ 50 Creating Basic Data for a Checklist Item ................................................................... 51 Creating Additional Data for a Checklist Item............................................................. 52 Creation of Data for a Task........................................................................................... 53 Creating Basic Data for a Task.................................................................................. 54 Creating Additional Data for a Task ........................................................................... 55 Editing Project Structures................................................................................................. 56 Basic Functions............................................................................................................ 58 Table View................................................................................................................ 58 Working with the Table View.................................................................................. 60 List View ................................................................................................................... 60 Graphical View.......................................................................................................... 61 Setting the Filter........................................................................................................ 63 Saving the Filter........................................................................................................ 65 Printing an Object ..................................................................................................... 66 Workflow................................................................................................................... 66 Alerts........................................................................................................................ 67 Lock Logic ................................................................................................................ 70 Multilingual Capabilities............................................................................................. 70 Using Language-Dependent Functions.................................................................. 72 Recording Changes .................................................................................................. 73 Archiving................................................................................................................... 74 Notes........................................................................................................................ 74 Project Planning ........................................................................................................... 75 Editing a Project Element.......................................................................................... 75 Deletion of Objects.................................................................................................... 76 Editing the Relationship Between Tasks.................................................................... 78 Scheduling................................................................................................................ 79 Time Constraints ................................................................................................... 81 Scheduling Manually ............................................................................................. 81 Releasing Project Elements ...................................................................................... 82

Collaboration Projects

5

.............................................................. 126 Candidates ...................................................................... 99 Distribution of Required Capacity over Periods................................................................................................. 88 Confirming Checklist Items...... 118 Selection According to Organizational Structure........................................................................... 97 Sorting Project Roles ......... 89 Confirming Tasks.................................................................................................................. 96 Creating a Project Role ..........................09.................................................................................... 122 Search Results .............. 118 Selection According to Qualifications............................................................................................................................................................................................... 114 Synchronize Project Roles to Staffing Process..................... 112 Staffing Process .................................. 86 Importing of Project Data............................................................................................................................. 121 Running a Search ....................... 104 Deleting a Task Assignment....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 Selection by Qualification ........ 93 Project Roles..........................................................................................Status ...............................SAP Online Help 12... 109 Deleting Qualifications .... 108 Defining Qualifications ............... 115 Resource Search................................................. 87 Confirmation.......................................... 90 Project Resource Planning...................... 119 Selection According to Availability.................. 83 Export to Microsoft Project (Client)................................ 130 Collaboration Projects 6 ...................................... 99 Views.. 113 Accepting Responsibility for Roles.. 85 Export to an XML File ...2008 Import and Export of Data ................. 94 General Definition of a Project Role ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106 Definition of Qualifications ...................... 126 Staffing of Project Roles with Resources ...................... 110 Staffing Process Tab Page........................................................... 89 Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet........................................................................................................................... 105 Assignment of Project Roles to Tasks ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123 Vacant Role Search .................................................................................................................................................. 110 Staffing Process ........................................................................................................................................................... 116 General Selection Criteria ............................................................................ 102 Assigning Tasks and Project Roles ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 Task Assignment...................... 83 Export to Microsoft Project (Server) ......................................... 122 Suitability Percentage .......................................................................................................................................................

... 169 Preliminary Costing and Quotation Creation ................................................................................ 176 Sales Pricing for cProjects ... 161 Deleting an Object Link ........................................ 133 Notifying a Selected Resource by E-Mail................... 145 Setting the Filter in the Multi-Project Monitor ......................................................................................................................................................... 137 Workflow for Resource-Booking Statuses.. 158 Editing an Object Link.......... 160 Displaying Linked Object Data..................................................................................................... 137 Creating a Soft Booking for a Resource .........................................09............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 150 Creation of Simulations and Snapshots ........................ 144 Multi-Project Monitor................................................................ 134 Reserving Resources.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 155 Deletion of Project Versions......... 164 Assignment of Cost/Revenue Rates............................... 140 Work with Mirrored Tasks ........... 167 Derivation of Organizational Data..........................................2008 Staffing Actions....................................................................... 160 Opening a Linked Object for Editing................................................. 161 Accounting Integration ......................................................... 136 Generic Interval Check...............................................................SAP Online Help 12........................................ 133 Staffing Project Roles with Resources........................................................... 147 Project Versions........................... 164 Costing Logic........................................................................................................ 131 Storing Resources As Candidates............................................................ 156 Object Links........................................................................................................................................................................................... 173 Ad Hoc Cost Estimate for cProjects................. 153 Reconciliation and Comparison of Versions .......................................................................................... 151 Creation of Snapshots in the Background ... 140 Multi-Project Management ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 178 Controlling............................. 140 Work with Subprojects..................................................................... 157 Creating an Object Link .......... 131 Creating a Business Partner ................................. 180 Collaboration Projects 7 ................................. 168 From the Opportunity to the Sales Order ............................................................................................................................................................. 142 Work with Programs ..... 148 Work with Versions.......................................... 139 Resource Manager ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 138 Creating a Groupware Task..................... 162 General Information About Accounting Integration ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 153 Performing Reconciliations and Comparisons ...............................................................

......................................................................................................................................... 190 Canceling a Shopping Cart.... 187 Integration with Supplier Relationship Management ............................................................................................................................... 204 Integration with a WebDAV Client.........................SAP Online Help 12.............................. 223 Integration with SAP Enterprise Portal............. 211 Defining the WebDAV URL............... 185 Automatic Creation of the Controlling Structure................ 224 Integration with Virtual Rooms ................... 222 Maintaining a Collaboration ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 223 Deleting a Link to a Collaboration ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 Editing Project and Collaboration Structures................................................................................................................................................................. 191 Staffing Tasks with External Resources ....................... 198 Assigning Documents and Creating Folders .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192 Creating and Opening a Control Plan ... 191 Control Plan.......... 225 Collaboration Projects 8 .................................................. 206 Technical Description and Configuration Information ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 209 Configuration of a WebDAV Repository Manager............................................................................................... 219 Creating a Collaboration.............................................................................................................................. 196 Work with Documents ...................................................................................................... 220 Transferring Documents .............................................09................. 216 Objects with the Same Name ...................................................................................................................2008 Controlling Cockpit............................ 203 Working with Document Info Records.......................................... 202 Integration with SAP Document Management ............................ 202 Tabular Document View.................................................................................... 218 Integration with cFolders........................................................................................ 193 Creating a Control Plan Version................................... 221 Renaming a Collaboration or a Folder ....................... 189 Creating a Shopping Cart ... 198 Editing the Document or Folder... 192 Editing a Control Plan................................................................................................................. 196 Creating Objects in the Control Plan ......................................................... 201 Content Versions ............................................................................................................................................... 219 Assigning an Existing Collaboration to a Project Element....................................................................................... 182 Multilevel Controlling...................................................................................................... 197 Documents. 214 Function Details ................................................................................... 183 Manual Creation of the Controlling Structure........... 181 Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders ...................................... 212 Editing Functions for Project and Collaboration Structures ........ 199 Using Document Templates ...........................

............................... 240 Beginning an Approval Again.......................................................... 242 Assigning Authorizations ................................................................. 234 Favorites ......................................................................... 235 Approving a Phase ..................... 228 Creating Project Status Reports........................................................ 256 Status of Documents ...................................................................................................... 250 Status of the Project Definition...................................................................................................... 254 Status of Checklists........................................................................................................................ 255 Status of Control Plan Versions .. 240 Granting an Approval........................ 239 Rejecting an Approval ............................................................................................................... 238 Canceling an Approval ............................2008 Integration with SAP xRPM ....................................................................................... 234 Search ..............................................................................................................................................................................................SAP Online Help 12........................ 238 Granting or Rejecting Individual Approvals........................................................................................................ 231 Creating and Displaying Evaluations.................................................................................................................................................................... 249 Superuser ...................................... 227 Project Status Reports ............................... 230 Evaluations...... 241 Authorizations........................................................ 257 Collaboration Projects 9 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 254 Status of Checklist Items ................... 253 Status of Tasks .................................................................... 250 Status of Phases ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 252 Status of Templates. 245 Assigning Administration Authorization............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 256 Status Information for Project Element................................................................ 250 Status Management...................................................................................................... 232 Exporting Evaluations................................................................................................................................................09...................................................................................................................... 248 Substitute............................................................. 236 Creating an Approval.............................. 228 Editing Project Status Reports ............ 247 User Groups...................................................................................................................................................................................... 237 Beginning an Approval .......................................................................................................................

SAP Online Help 12. You can open each element by clicking the link. To navigate backwards and forwards between pages in the documentation. Work with cProjects Navigation [Seite 10] Project Elements [Seite 12] Typical Functions for Decision Makers [Seite 16] Typical Functions for Project Leads [Seite 15] Typical Functions for Project Participants [Seite 16] Typical Functions for Project Resource Planners [Seite 16] Navigation Use Note the following special features of navigation in cProjects: When you navigate in the project structure. For more information about cProjects analyses with BI Content. No standard logoff page is supplied with cProjects. Collaboration Projects 10 . Do not leave the application by closing the browser before exiting the application.2008 Collaboration Projects Purpose Collaboration Projects (cProjects) is a cross-industry tool that you use to plan and monitor development and consultant projects. see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Information Integration by Key Capability BI Content Product Lifecycle Management BW: cProjects. Use the Exit function in the top right-hand corner to leave the application. the system displays the path with the superior elements below the different views (breadcrumb [Extern]). You can define your own page and use this.09. use the Back function in the context menu via the secondary mouse button.

For more information about using the modification-free enhancement concept in cProjects. see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide (IMG) under Global Enhancements to Project Elements Show Additional Tab Page in cProjects.0 was created with Web Dynpro for ABAP.09. A number of different options are available for enhancing or changing the user interface. if you want to display a new customer-specific field. see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI Technology Web Dynpro ABAP Web Dynpro ABAP: Development in Detail Advanced Concepts ModificationFree Enhancements. see SAP Notes 947936 and 942672.SAP Online Help 12. General Changes to Web-Dynpro-ABAP Applications You can also carry out general enhancements to Web-Dynpro-ABAP applications.2008 Adjustment or Enhancement of the User Interface Use The user interface of cProjects 4. Personalization of the User Interface Use Web Dynpro for ABAP provides a general. see SAP Note 971394. You can either make adjustments that are specific to the cProjects application or you can make general changes to Web-Dynpro-ABAP applications. For more information. see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide under Global Enhancements to Project Elements Define Field Groups for Customer Fields. Defining a tab page for customer-specific fields For more information. see SAP Note 972339. cross-application concept for personalizing the user interface. You can use the framework for modification-free enhancements for this. see SAP Note 942560. You can use this to personalize the user interface on a user-specific basis or an administrator can use it to personalize the user interface on a general basis for all users in Collaboration Projects 11 . Features cProjects-Specific Adjustments The following application-specific adjustments to the cProjects user interface are possible: Defining a customer-specific tab page For more information. For more information about adjusting or enhancing the cProjects user interface. Inserting new or customer-specific columns in the table view [Seite 58] For more information. Defining fields as required entry fields or hiding fields For more information. for example. Displaying new or customer-specific fields in the dashboard [Seite 20] For more information. see SAP Note 950896.

you can create tasks and checklists with checklist items [Seite 15]. you can hide interface elements. These elements include: Project definition [Seite 12] Phases [Seite 14] Checklists [Seite 14] Checklist items [Seite 15] Tasks [Seite 15] Project roles [Seite 94] Project Definition Definition Project element at the highest hierarchy level of a project. For more information about the personalization options provided by Web Dynpro ABAP applications. Features You can personalize the cProjects interface according to your requirements. If you use the userspecific personalization option. you can create tasks [Seite 15].09. The project definition contains general data of the project and information that is valid for the whole project. you can hide and change the order of tab pages. Integration Below the project definition. If you use the cross-application personalization option. for example. click your chosen element with the secondary mouse button and make your selection from the menu that appears. such as table columns. Collaboration Projects 12 . Activities To personalize interface elements in cProjects. Below the phases. checklists [Seite 14]. Project Elements Definition Superordinate concept for all structuring elements in cProjects.2008 a client of a particular system. and checklist references [Seite 40]. Below the project definition.SAP Online Help 12. see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI Technology Web Dynpro ABAP Reference End User and Administrator Personalization Advanced Concepts Personalization Web Dynpro ABAP: Development in Detail and Configuration Personalization. a project is structured using phases [Seite 14]. you can hide tab pages.

which function the resource carries out in the project. see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]. Here. To do so. see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles BAdI: Control Truncation and Deletion of Roles and Staffings. that is. choose Check. For more information about creating project roles. A similar resource description exists in Organizational Management. you can check whether all assignments and staffings are consistent.2008 Project Roles Definition A project role represents a position in a project that is to be filled by a business partner. staff roles with resources. the role of consultant in a consulting project. You use the DPR_TRUNCATE Business Add-In (BAdI) to control whether or how the system is to delete or truncate the project roles and staffings when an operational project is completed or if it is canceled.SAP Online Help 12. once you have created the project roles. Project roles can have the following statuses: A red icon if the project role is not staffed A yellow icon if the project role is partially staffed A green icon if the project role is fully staffed You can define the following attributes for each project role: The qualifications a resource requires to be able to fulfill the project role The tasks that a resource is to work on The work and time frame for the individual tasks Once you have assigned tasks to the project role and staffed the project role with resources. You can only assign tasks.09. Collaboration Projects 13 . Use You create project roles according to the planned requirement for a project. thereby creating the foundation of Resource Planning. for example. The project role describes which type of resource is required in a project. For more information. the positions describe the resources required for the organizational plan. and therefore complete resource planning. The project role includes information about the qualifications that the resource should have and when and for how long the resource should be available.

See Sorting Project Roles [Seite 99].SAP Online Help 12. A phase begins with the release and ends with the approval [Seite 236]. you define the business attributes of each project role and assign persons to it.09. You can sort the project roles at any time to get a better overview. The following tab pages are available: General [Seite 96] (detail view for the project role) Tasks [Seite 102] Staffing Process [Seite 110] Qualifications [Seite 108] Costing [Seite 167] Staffing [Seite 126] Documents [Seite 198] Notes [Seite 74] Shopping Cart [Seite 190] Object Links [Seite 157] Recording Changes [Seite 73] Phase Definition A clearly defined period in a project. Integration You can further subdivide a phase using checklists [Seite 14] and tasks [Seite 15]. In the screen area on the right. Collaboration Projects 14 . see Status Management [Seite 250]. For more information about statuses. A phase is considered released when the status Released is set in the phase. Checklist Definition Control list with items that must be processed. You can also hide the role list to gain more space for editing a project role.2008 Structure The project role overview with the current status and assigned resources is always displayed in the screen area on the left in the project role definition.

you can also create tasks below other tasks.SAP Online Help 12. Integration You can assign tasks to a project definition [Seite 12]. Typical Functions for Project Leads Creation of a Project [Seite 30] Multi-Project Management [Seite 140] Object Links [Seite 157] Scheduling [Seite 79] Project Versions [Seite 148] Substitute [Seite 249] Accounting Integration [Seite 162] Evaluations [Seite 231] Beginning an Approval [Seite 238] Collaboration Projects 15 . tasks help to record and structure necessary processing steps. If your system administrator permitted subtasks for a project type. or a checklist item [Seite 15]. you cannot create any subtasks for tasks below a project definition. Structure A checklist consists of checklist items [Seite 15].09. Task Definition Smallest part of a project. Use Checklist items represent important requirements that have to be met in order to achieve the project goal. However. Project participants check off the items they have finished.2008 Use Checklists ensure that all important aspects of a project or of a phase are taken into account. Checklist Item Definition Part of a checklist [Seite 14]. Use In projects. a phase [Seite 14].

SAP Online Help Archiving [Seite 74] Project Status Reports [Seite 228] Work with Documents [Seite 197] 12.2008 Typical Functions for Project Participants Evaluations [Seite 231] Work with Documents [Seite 197] Confirming Tasks [Seite 89] Confirming Checklist Items [Seite 89] Integration with cFolders [Seite 219] Control Plan [Seite 192] Object Links [Seite 157] Typical Functions for Project Resource Planners Creating a Project Role [Seite 97] Task Assignment [Seite 102] Definition of Qualifications [Seite 108] Staffing Process [Seite 110] Resource Search [Seite 116] Staffing of Project Roles with Resources [Seite 126] Notifying a Selected Resource by E-Mail [Seite 133] Staffing Project Roles with Resources [Extern] Creating a Groupware Task [Seite 139] Typical Functions for Decision Makers Granting or rejecting individual approvals [Seite 238] Collaboration Projects 16 .09.

2. you can hide it if you want to (see Making User Settings [Seite 28]).09. Initial views There are many ways to access a project.. 3. Enter the project number of the project you want to open.SAP Online Help 12. 1. Dashboard [Seite 20] Opening a Project or Project Version Prerequisites You are in the Projects or Versions initial view in the Open area. Version . Choose Continue. When you call the application for the first time. Select the version type you want to open. For example. you can find it by using the search function [Seite 26]. project leads open projects for editing while project members who want to confirm checklist items access the checklist items directly. However. Features Header area In the header area. Collaboration Projects 17 . The system opens the project in the view in which you were last working. You see the initial views on every screen in the application. Enter a version number. Procedure Project . The initial view you choose depends on your concrete role and tasks. If you do not know the number. you can display your own logo or a user-specific URL. You make the required settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Basic Settings Make General Interface Settings.2008 Functions on the Start Page Use The start page is the central access page in the cProjects application. You can now edit the project (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). Enter the number of the project version you want to open. You see the header area on every screen in the application.. The initial views you see depend on your role. 2. 1. the Projects initial view appears.

whereas a simulation has its own number. you create a complete project. For a simulation: Select a version as the version for copy. If you use a template. You can also open a project from the project list [Seite 25] or favorites list [Seite 24].. The input help displays the simulation versions that are available. 3.. Choose Continue. You already defined and released templates. 5. Procedure . You can only use templates with the project type you selected in the previous step. Enter a project number for the new project. Prerequisites . Choose Create. Creating a Project Definition Use The first step in creating a project is creating a project definition [Seite 12]. Choose a template type (project template or simulation). 1. Collaboration Projects 18 . The system checks whether the number has been assigned yet. 4. 4. 2. Select a template.SAP Online Help 12.09. For a project template: Choose a project type from the dropdown box. Select a project number as the template. if applicable (see Templates [Seite 36]). Enter the original language. Choose Create. You can enter any string of characters. You have authorization for the authorization object CPRO_PTYPE for the project types you want to use. This is where you define the data for your project. You cannot use operational projects as templates.2008 The number of a snapshot is always the same as the number of the operational project it belongs to. The input help displays the existing simulation project numbers. You are in the Projects initial view.

see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide (IMG) under Metrics Management Define Object Types Define Metrics Groups Define Metrics Define Currencies Define Quantities Define Metrics Value Types Assign Metrics Value Type to Metrics Groups Define Metrics-Independent Groups Collaboration Projects 19 . Prerequisites You have created a project definition whose project type permits the use of the project charter. These fields are not language-dependent.09. This enables you to define a logical group of project charters. and goals for the project charter. You are in the editing view of this project definition on the Project Charter tab page. scope. You can define key figures for the project charter by means of generic metrics management. Save your entries. For more information. 6. Features Detail tab page: Here you can enter descriptions for the problem. For more information. You can continue to structure your project here and enter all the necessary data. You can adjust the content displayed in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Note that the system creates your project only after you have saved the data. Creating a Project Charter for a Project Definition Use In the project charter you define current values and target values along with the scope and benefits of a project. Metrics tab page: Here you can select a group for the project charter.SAP Online Help 12. you have selected the language in which you want to enter languagedependent texts. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot [Extern] or simulation. The project charter helps you to plan and carry out Six Sigma projects. In the Language field. You can display the object attribute group in the dashboard [Seite 20]. You cannot edit the project charter in the template.2008 The editing screen of the new project appears. You have selected the Project Charter indicator in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types. see Creation of a Project [Seite 30].

You can display additional or customer-specific fields in the dashboard. Collaboration Projects 20 . such as the Projects and Tasks initial views. The dashboard [Extern] is available in a number of initial views. see Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70].09. Note that the browser language then only applies if the URL does not specify a language.SAP Online Help Two metrics groups are supplied with the standard system: o Financial data: 12. You can enter the benefits that come from using the project charter. these entries are language-dependent. For more information. You can define the unit in which the values are to be entered for each key figure. you only see the project name and the criticality level. For more information. see SAP Note 971394. the metrics value type fields of the metric can no longer be changed and the system displays the date of the final value. for example. You can define the currency in which the values are to be entered for each key figure. Once this indicator has been selected. In the Validated field. Prerequisites You made the following settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects: You activated the dashboard function for the appropriate project type and specified when evaluations are to be performed by choosing Evaluations and Dashboard in the Define Project Types IMG activity. the dashboard is only updated after a new evaluation has taken place.2008 You can enter the actual and target data for the financial key figures Return on Investment and Savings. actual. You can select the Final Value indicator for each metric. We recommend that you use the URL parameter if you want to change the language for a short amount of time and adjust your browser settings if you need to change the language long term. you can specify for each metrics value type whether the values have been validated. and target data for the self-defined key figures and Sigma value. If you change data in the project that affects the KPIs that were calculated. Dashboard Use This function gives you an overview of various Key Performance Indicators [Extern] (KPIs) for your projects. and no KPIs for the project. Integration The KPIs are partly read straight from the project data and partly calculated in the evaluations [Seite 231]. If you do not do this. o Key figures: You can enter the basic.

The other initial views display non-aggregated values of the project element.2008 You assigned the extract layout for the dashboard evaluations to the relevant project types in the Assign Extract Layouts to Project Types IMG activity. you can choose from a number of different dashboard views. Personalization Under Settings you have the following options for personalizing the dashboard: You can show or hide columns. the system does not update the dashboard when you save. If you change project elements in the Tasks or Checklist Items views. Last Used Tasks. and Versions initial views for the version type simulation always display aggregated values of the project element. the information in the dashboard is updated accordingly when the next evaluation is performed. You can print the table or export it to Microsoft® Excel. You can save your selection of columns as a view.09. This is even possible if the project elements belong to different projects. you can change the number of rows that are displayed. for example. You can use filter functions. for example: Projects: Displays a project list [Seite 25]. or Checklist Items: Displays all the objects you have already edited. Favorites: Displays the objects that you added to your favorites [Seite 24]. Features Dashboard Views Depending on which initial view you are in. General Functions In the task and checklist views you can also select multiple project elements at a time and open them for editing. However. You can display additional information in the dashboard by including new attributes in the layout for the dashboard evaluations. Substitute: Displays all objects for which you are acting as a substitute. they are only created in connection with the Projects entry object. The data for a project is displayed in the dashboard once an evaluation exists. If you change any data. SAP supplies the 0_DASHBOARD layout with the standard system. Collaboration Projects 21 . The Customizing settings for the project type dictate when evaluations are created.SAP Online Help 12. You assigned icons to the attributes for the evaluations in the Define Attributes and Object Types for Evaluations IMG activity. You can specify the order of the columns. Projects. The Projects. The system only updates the dashboard if the whole project is loaded in change mode but this is not the case for these two views. You can adjust the table design. Control Plan. You can delete entries from the list.

and checklist items and display them in the Multi-Project Monitor [Seite 145].2008 You can select multiple projects. the system displays the comment No data available. Information in the Dashboard The following table is an overview of all the columns you can display in the dashboard: Column Title Crit. Mandatory Ctrl Plan Name of the project element Project type of object Description of the project type Object attribute phase type Object attribute task type Object attribute checklist type Object attribute group Object attribute search field Object attribute process Object attribute that is only relevant to tasks Object attribute that is only relevant to tasks Object attribute that is only relevant to tasks Number of control plans The number of control plans always refers to a project because you can only create and edit control plans at project level.Finish Act. Number Project/Task/Checklist Unique project number The language-dependent name is visible in the corresponding column or by displaying the quick info text over the project number. for App. tasks. Start Documents ObjectLink Collabs Sys.SAP Online Help 12. Type Description Project Type Phase Type Task Type Checklist Type Group Search Field Process Milestone Relev. Act.09. this is the severity of the violation. If the project type of a project does not support the dashboard function. If no evaluation has taken place yet. the system displays the comment No evaluation planned. Actual finish date of an object Actual start date of an object Number of documents for a project element Number of object links for a project element Number of collaborations Current system status of an object Current user status of an object Collaboration Projects 22 . Last Evaluation Date and time of the last evaluation The data in the dashboard originates from this time. Project/Phase/Task/Checklist Proj.Status User Stat.Level Meaning Criticality level When the threshold value of a project is violated.

Sever. both automatic and aggregated (see also Evaluations [Seite 231]). Result Result of a checklist item.or overstaffed. Pers. Scope Met Scope of project was met Checks whether the amount of project work has exceeded the amount planned. have actually been completed. Status profile that is used Person responsible for a project element Maximum severity of a project element If a manual severity exists. Plan. Costs Planned costs Collaboration Projects 23 . Staff. Deadl.Stat Staffing status Shows whether a project is under. Start Met Start date of project was met Checks whether the actual start date is after the latest planned start date. Agg.Resp.Prof. Max. ManualSev. You define the possible values in Customizing. the system calculates the number of days by which the project is delayed. Manual severity of the threshold value Aggregated severity of a threshold value Maximum severity of the actual project element and its lower-level project elements. for example. Percentage of work completed This is calculated from the total work confirmed for all tasks and the remaining work.SAP Online Help 12. Priority Project’s priority You specify the priority for the project definition. this is only relevant for checklist items Note that the following KPIs always refer to the project even if you are in the Tasks initial view. Met Tasks that met the deadline Shows what percentage of tasks that should have been completed by the current date. the highest severity of a project element is the highest degree of severity of all your own severities.Delay Project delay Based on the average amount of work confirmed each day. If no manual severity exists. Finish Met Finish date of project was met Checks whether the actual finish date is after the latest planned finish date. See also Evaluations [Seite 231]. Proj.Sever.09. this is the maximum severity. Work Cmpl.2008 Stat.

Costs Budget Actual costs Budget Currency Currency of the costs and of the budget Favorites List Use In the favorites list you can display objects you process or open often. Activities Add an object to your favorites list. The system displays all objects apart from user groups with an icon [Extern].2008 Act. the system displays the No Value Set icon. Prerequisites If you want to display the criticality level of an object. you have to schedule evaluations [Seite 231] for the objects in the favorites lists. To delete an object from the favorites list. If no results are available. This icon shows whether the threshold values have been violated in a project. see Adding Objects to the Favorites List [Seite 24].SAP Online Help 12. Adding Objects to the Favorites List Use You can create a personal favorites list for the following objects: Projects Tasks Checklist items Evaluations Collaboration Projects 24 . You show the favorites by choosing the Favorites application view in the dashboard [Seite 20]. For more information. see Evaluations [Seite 231]. You can create your own views in the settings.09. Features You can open the objects displayed here by clicking once with your mouse. select it and then choose Delete from Dashboard. For more information.

Choose Add to Favorites.SAP Online Help 12. Procedure Adding an Object from the Editing View to the Favorites List This procedure is not valid for evaluations or user groups. Projects view: All projects which contain checklist The checklist items have been Collaboration Projects 25 . Projects view: All projects which contain tasks to which you are assigned by means of a role.. you can only add tasks to your favorites list and not projects or checklist items. Project List The following table shows what the system displays in your personal project list on the various tab pages and which prerequisites must be met. Choose Add to Favorites.09. select the project element you want to add to the favorites list. Adding a Project Element from the Search Results to the Favorites List . In the structure tree in the left screen area. This pushbutton appears only for the object in whose initial view you are located. you want to access a project from the Tasks initial view. means of a role. Checklist The tasks have been released. for example. In the Search Results screen area.. Tab Page Information Displayed Other Prerequisites Projects Projects view: All projects which contain projects The project has not been or project elements to which you are assigned by completed yet. If. 1. select the object you want to add to the favorites list. Note that this pushbutton is only active for the objects for which you can create a favorites list.2008 User groups Templates Versions Prerequisites You are in the editing view or in the search results of an object. . 2. 2. and start the search there. 1. Tasks Tasks view: All tasks to which you are assigned by means of a role.

released. All projects to which you are assigned by means of a role and whose project type supports control plans (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types ). If necessary. See also: Dashboard Search Function Use You use the search function to search for project elements and documents. Enter the required search criteria or choose an entry from the dropdown box. Collaboration Projects 26 . A maximum of 100 hits will be displayed by default. Enter one or more search criteria and choose Search in Results. For more information. Activities . see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide (IMG) under Global Enhancements to Project Elements Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Adjust SearchResult List. see Project Resource Planning. 2.. you can carry out a search in the search results. You can adjust the search result list by means of the BAdI DPR_DPR_SEARCH. you can limit the number of search results by specifying a Maximum Number of Hits. Checklist Items view: All checklist items to which you are assigned by means of a role. If there are more than 10 entries in the search results. The search criteria that you can enter are dependent on what you are searching for.09.SAP Online Help Items items to which you are assigned by means of a role. You can only enter a business partner as the template responsible (see Creating a Business Partner). For more information about the assignment of roles.2008 Control Plans All templates in which you are specified as the Templates Template Responsible. You can open the objects displayed in the Search Results area by clicking once with your mouse. 12. Integration You can add a project element that is displayed as a search result to your favorites list [Seite 24] by choosing Add to Favorites. 1. 3. Choose Find. Versions All simulations or snapshots for which you have administration authorization.

2008 Vacant Role Search You use this function to find roles that have not been fully staffed that are available within a certain time frame. From here you can: Create a print version in PDF Export the data to Microsoft Excel Display detail data Select a project role and choose Detail Data.SAP Online Help 12. you can enter your e-mail address in the E-Mail Address field under User Settings User . Tasks.09. Collaboration Projects 27 . the system displays an e-mail link which you can use to contact this person. Send detail data to yourself in an e-mail Select a project role and choose Send E-Mail. The project lead marks a role as vacant so that it can be recognized as an unstaffed or partially staffed role from outside the project. This enables you to search worldwide for the best available talent in an enterprise. You can send the detail data of the selected role to yourself if an e-mail address is specified for your user in the system. End of the note. or Checklist Items initial view and choose Vacant Roles. Note In cProjects. This data only becomes available the next time you open the search. Prerequisites You are in the Projects. If a contact person has been specified and this business partner has an e-mail address. Features You can enter the following criteria for the search: Time frame Project type Role type Area Location Function Qualifications The system displays the search result in a table.

2008 Selection by Qualification Use You can choose qualifications as selection criteria for the vacant role search. Specify the required proficiency for each qualification. You can also use the search function: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search. Select qualifications by expanding the qualifications catalog and selecting the required qualification(s). the system only takes those roles that have at least this qualification into account. If a qualification is an essential requirement. Collaboration Projects 28 . The system also takes roles into account for the suitability percentage that have a language proficiency below this level. You can specify a minimum suitability percentage in the selection criteria. you specify "fluent". 6. Then choose >> (Add Selected Qualification to Qualification Requirements). choose Find Vacant Roles. Integration The system automatically displays all qualifications that exist in the system. Example: For language proficiency. There are only two types of priority for qualifications: essential requirements and optional requirements. Note that in resource management.SAP Online Help 12.09. The system calculates a role’s suitability percentage from the difference between the required proficiency of a qualification and the degree to which the role fulfills this. To run the search. Making User Settings Prerequisites You are in the User Settings area. Prerequisites You are in the vacant role search. The system displays a search results list from which you can select the qualifications you require. Features You can add qualifications you want to use as search criteria or delete those you no longer require. See Definition of Qualifications [Seite 108]. Activities 4. 5. 7. The system also takes roles into account which have the qualification but not at the required level of proficiency. alternative qualifications are not taken into account in the calculation of the suitability percentage. Select the processing mode you want to set as default for opening projects. Procedure Making General Settings 1.

Note If you are using cProjects via SAP Enterprise Portal. deselect the Display Header indicator. The system uses this value for the width of the structure tree in the table and detail views. Decide whether you want to display the Change Documents tab page and select or deselect the Display Change Documents checkbox accordingly. 8. If you want to hide the user-specific header area in the application./Lst Dates. Save your settings. 2. Select the Scheduling Only Manually indicator if you want the dates of the project elements to be calculated by calling scheduling manually or by saving and you do not want the system to calculate them automatically. It affects how the dates of the SAP objects are displayed in the graphical view. Enter your user data in the Own Data area or edit the data there. Save your data. Note If. 3. the Display Header indicator is hidden because the system uses the header area of the portal by default. Save your entries. enter your old password in the Password field in the Password Change area. 2. Under Earl. End of the note. Choose the time zone. in the user settings. Setting Default Values 1. 5. 6.09. Choose whether you want to view and edit your project texts in the original language or in the logon language and make the default setting in the dropdown box (see Multilingual Capabilities). Collaboration Projects 29 . End of the note. 7. 4.2008 If you open a project element in the Display processing mode. the required date format. 3. select a date type. Select the values cProjects displays by default when you create a project or template. The date type is only relevant if you use object links. and the decimal point format. If you want to adjust the width of the structure tree. choose whether the system should display the earliest or latest dates in the Gantt chart.SAP Online Help 12. 2. they are no longer used here. Calling scheduling manually can have a positive effect on performance if you are working with large project structures. 4. enter the required number of pixels under Tree Width (Px). the system does not set a lock indicator and other project participants can edit the project. If you want to change your password. If applicable. you set up object types that were deactivated at a later point in time. Making User Settings 1.

Do not enter cProjects itself as a URL. Save your new password. Making Technical Settings 1.09. see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Global Enhancements to Project Elements Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Check or Change Graphical View Display . Enter your new password in the New Password field and again in the Repeat Password field. Making Settings for the Graphic Select the Without Relationships checkbox if you do not want to display or edit relationships in the graphical view. As a result. Page field. Make this default setting in the dropdown box. 6. Note You can only make user-specific settings for those columns that are not already hidden by the CPRO_GANTT enhancement spot. For more information about setting up the URL. 2. End of the note.. End of the caution. causing the application to call itself again and again. enter the absolute URL you want to see on the Info tab page. For more information. you are no longer able to change the URL in the application. End of the note. 1. see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Basic Settings Make General Interface Settings . You can change this setting each time you upload a document if need be.2008 5. the system immediately jumps to the page you specified when you call cProjects. Caution Some pages cannot be viewed within the application.SAP Online Help 12. if applicable (see Templates [Seite 36]). In the URL Info.. Creation of a Project Prerequisites . You already defined templates. Note You see the URL Info. In either case. Under Hidden Table Columns select the table columns that you do not want the system to display in the table part of the graphic. Page field only if your system administrator specified that you can enter your own URL. Decide whether you want to create a new version of a document or whether you want to overwrite the existing version when you upload documents. Collaboration Projects 30 . but are displayed as full screens instead. Only your system administrator can undo the setting. By doing so you create an infinite loop.

assigns them to tasks. You can enter any string of characters. You created a project definition [Seite 12] (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31]). 4. . The project lead creates checklists [Seite 14] with checklist items [Seite 15] and enters the data for the checklist [Seite 48] and for the checklist item [Seite 50]. 2. a. and then assigns persons to the roles (see Project Resource Planning [Seite 93]). 6. Procedure . Process Flow .. if applicable (see Templates [Seite 36]). Collaboration Projects 31 .2008 2. The project lead creates roles. 1. If you use a template. The project lead creates tasks [Seite 15] and enters the data for the tasks [Seite 53]. Prerequisites . A project participant assigns documents to the project elements and creates a collaboration in cFolders (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]). you create a complete project. A project participant creates object links to the project elements (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). 5. The system checks whether the number has been assigned yet. The project lead enters the required data for the project definition (see Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition [Seite 43]). You already defined and released templates. Choose Create.SAP Online Help 12. The project lead structures the project through the project elements. The project lead performs scheduling [Seite 79]. Creating a Project Definition Use The first step in creating a project is creating a project definition [Seite 12]. 1. The project can now be processed (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). This is where you define the data for your project. c.. Result The project is available in the system and all of the relevant entries have been made. You are in the Projects initial view. b. You have authorization for the authorization object CPRO_PTYPE for the project types you want to use. The project lead creates phases [Seite 14] and enters the data for the phase [Seite 46].09. 3.. 7. 2.. A project participant creates a control plan for the project (see Creating and Opening a Control Plan [Seite 192]). Enter a project number for the new project.

the system displays all the project elements that you can insert beside the selected project element or directly below the selected project element. see Creation of a Project [Seite 30]. You cannot use operational projects as templates. 5. You created a checklist template [Seite 36]. You opened a project for processing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). Choose Create. In the structure tree [Seite 41] in the left screen area. Procedure . The input help displays the existing simulation project numbers. Prerequisites You created a project definition (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31]). For more information. select the project element for which you want to create new project elements. 6.. Creating Project Elements Use You structure your project by creating new project elements. The input help displays the simulation versions that are available. For a project template: Choose a project type from the dropdown box. Enter the original language. Select a project number as the template. Note that the system creates your project only after you have saved the data. The following table provides an overview of the possible project elements: Project Element Possible Parallel Possible Lower-Level What Else You should Collaboration Projects 32 .SAP Online Help 3. 4. 1. 12. For a simulation: Select a version as the version for copy. Save your entries. In the dropdown box above the structure tree. Choose a template type (project template or simulation). as required. You can continue to structure your project here and enter all the necessary data. Select a template.09. The editing screen of the new project appears.2008 You can only use templates with the project type you selected in the previous step.

Save your entries. See also: Including Subtrees from Templates [Seite 41] Collaboration Projects 33 . Select the project element that you want to create and then choose Create. Phase Phase Checklist Task Checklist Checklist Task Checklist item Checklist item Task Checklist item Task Checklist Task Subtask You can only create subtasks if the project type of the current project allows this.SAP Online Help Project Elements Project definition Project Elements Phase Checklist Task 12. For more information. 3. See also: Task Hierarchies [Seite 34] 2. see: Creation of Data for a Phase [Seite 46] Creating Data for a Checklist [Seite 48] Creating Data for a Checklist Item [Seite 50] Work with Checklist References [Seite 40] Creation of Data for a Task [Seite 53] 4. The system creates parallel project elements beside the selected project element and lower-level project elements below the selected project element. Enter the data for your new project element.09. You cannot create subtasks for tasks directly below the project definition.2008 Know You can only create checklists and tasks directly below the project definition if the project type of the current project allows this.

save your changes. For more information. Phase type c. Task type In Customizing for Collaboration Projects.2008 Deactivation of Object Types Use You can deactivate the following object types: a. this object type is still visible and can be selected. the system copies the existing object type. you must activate this object type again in Customizing before you can undo your changes. If an existing object uses an object type that was deactivated after the object was created. The system does not check whether the Active indicator is selected for this object type. If an object uses an object type that is not active. Project type b. we recommend that the administrator checks the project and checklist templates for objects types that are not active and should no longer be used and adjusts the templates accordingly. Integration You can only use summary tasks in bottom-up scheduling [Seite 79]. Define Phase Types g. Task Hierarchies Use You use this function to structure the tasks that belong to a project in a hierarchy. Checklist type d. Define Checklist Types h. The BAdI DPR_DEACTIVATE_TYPES provides you with more options for deactivating object types. Therefore. Collaboration Projects 34 . deselect the Active indicator under Structure e.09. If an object uses an object type that is not active and you change the object type. and then want to undo your changes afterwards.SAP Online Help 12. Define Project Types f. If you create objects with a template or copy objects from templates or other objects in the project. see the documentation for the BAdI. Define Task Types A deactivated object type no longer appears as a value for selection when you create a new object. the system continues to display the object type in this object.

Hierarchies Without Summary Tasks You can perform all activities at any level of the task hierarchy. Prerequisites You are in the screen for processing a project element. Integration The Criticality Level button allows you to display the threshold value violations for a task or checklist item and set a manual severity. The Tasks or Subtasks button allows you to display the tasks or subtasks of a checklist item or task. Some activities can only be carried out for tasks that are not summary tasks. There are no summary tasks. this task becomes a summary task. You cannot create subtasks for tasks directly below the project definition. Hierarchies with Summary Tasks Once you create a subtask for a task. for which you can create tasks or checklist items (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]). Features Task hierarchies are formed when you create subtasks for tasks. Collaboration Projects 35 . Features You can display the basic data for a checklist item or task using the Detail button. These include: Confirming time Entering qualifications Assigning project roles Planning work Assigning cost and revenue rates Some of the information from the subtasks is aggregated in the summary task.2008 Prerequisites In Customizing for Collaboration Projects you specified that task hierarchies are allowed. Mass Data Entry Use This function enables you to display larger numbers of tasks or checklist items in a tabular overview and create and edit them there.SAP Online Help 12. by choosing Structure Define Project Types. You specify in Customizing whether you want to use task hierarchies with or without summary tasks [Extern].09.

Open one of the following tab pages depending on the project element. For more information see Status Management [Seite 250] and Status of Templates [Seite 253].. Integration Each template has a status. Choose Enter to confirm your entries. This allows you to better standardize your projects.SAP Online Help 12. Use When carrying out projects you must take into consideration externally defined structures. 1. see Creating a Template [Seite 36]. To accommodate these requirements you can create templates that you can use every time you create a project. for which you want to use mass data entry: Tasks Subtasks Checklist Items 2. such as norms or general regulations on the one hand. enter the name of the new task or checklist item. 3.09. Templates Definition Templates define the basic structure of an object.2008 Activities . Change the data or enter new data. Creating a Template Collaboration Projects 36 . To create new tasks or checklist items. You can create templates for the following objects: Projects Checklists Control plans Documents You can create templates as follows: Without a template Based on an existing template (for project and checklist templates only) Based on an operational project or a checklist in an operational project (for project or checklist templates only) For more information. and internal standards such as procedure instructions or rules on the other.

Creating a Template Without a Template . The system checks whether the number has been assigned yet. You can change this number at a later date. If you chose the template category Document Template. Choose No Template for project and checklist templates. They are not used for the authorization check in the template. see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198].2008 Use You can create templates [Seite 36] in a variety of ways: Without a template Based on an existing template (for project and checklist templates only) Based on an operational project or a checklist in an operational project (for project and checklist templates only) Prerequisites You are in the Templates initial view in cProjects. if required. the system branches directly to the editing view for creating new document templates. You are not required to make this selection for control plan templates. It is language-independent.09. You can enter any combination of letters and numbers.SAP Online Help 12. The system checks the following objects: Project template Checklist template Control plan template Operational project Control plan If you do not enter a number. 1. You can exit the editing screen for document templates in the following ways: . Collaboration Projects 37 . 3. For more information.. but in the operational project. Select the template category you want to create and choose Create.. Enter a number for the new template. By selecting a different template category in the upper left-hand area. Procedure The authorizations you specify for templates are simply authorization templates. proceed as follows: 2. You can enter the project type or checklist type either straight away or later on. When you create an operational project in the template they are copied to the project. the system generates a number. By selecting a different initial view. For all other templates. The number uniquely identifies the template.

2. . 4. 1. Checklists without a reference are not transferred to the project template and changes you made to checklists from resolved references are lost. You can use the 5. From All Checklists The system creates new checklist templates from operational checklists without a reference and from resolved checklist references and the new checklist templates are automatically included in the new project template. 4. Only Checklists Without a Reference The system creates new checklist templates from operational checklists without a reference and the new checklist templates are automatically included in the new project template. 2. Enter a number for the new template. The system opens the template you specified. 12. Choose Create. b. Creating a Template Based on an Operational Project This procedure applies to project and checklist templates only. Existing checklist references are transferred to the project template and resolved checklist references are replaced by the original reference. Enter the number of the project or checklist template you want to use as a template in the Template field. search [Seite 26] to find the number. 1. None No new templates are created. Creating a Template with a Template This procedure applies to project and checklist templates only. A project template only contains checklist references and no operational checklists. The table below shows you where you can find more information about the necessary data entries. Choose Project or Checklist as the template. when you create a project template. Therefore. . Change the existing data. Existing checklist references are transferred to the project template and resolved checklist references are replaced by the original reference. Enter all the data you want to save in the template.2008 5. Choose Create. you have to decide under New Checklist Templates whether the existing checklists of the operational project are to be changed into templates. 6. c.. Existing checklist references are transferred to the project template. The table below shows you where you can find more information about the necessary data entries. Choose Project Template or Checklist Template as the template.SAP Online Help 4. 3. Enter the number of the template project or template checklist in the Template field. 3. 5. Collaboration Projects 38 .09.. Select the template category you want to create and choose Create. Enter a number for the new template. Select the template category you want to create and choose Create. You have the following options: a.

. such as fixed dates. For more information. . Template Category Project template Procedure . see Creating a Business Partner [Seite 131]. select the 1. you now have the opportunity. Not all fields exist that are available when you create an operational project because you cannot enter operational data.. Specify the following in the project template: Whether the checklist references you are using in the template are automatically resolved when you create a project from this template. What You Should Know . Enter the data as described in Creation of a Project [Seite 30].. 2. For more information. You first have to create the business partners you want to assign here.. Enter the data as described in Creating Data for a Checklist [Seite 48]. or change the existing data.2008 The system opens the object you specified. Not all fields exist that are available when you create an operational checklist because you cannot enter operational data.09.. The table below shows you where you can find more information about the necessary data entries. Checklist template 1. Collaboration Projects 39 . enter a Status Profile Template. see Creating a Business Partner [Seite 131].. Enter the following on the Additional Data tab page: The business partner number of the person responsible in the Template Responsible field. such as fixed dates. You first have to create the business partners you want to assign here.SAP Online Help 6. 2.. Enter the following on the Additional Data tab page: The business partner number of the person responsible in the Template Responsible field. 2. 1. Under Changeability [Extern].. The system does not transfer operational data. What happens to the project roles from a checklist template (see also Work with Checklist References [Seite 40]). . if required. If you have not yet done so. 12. 2. 1. Choose Create. 7. If you want to use your user status in the operational project. Enter new data.

Once you release the corresponding phase. the templates are created. such as dates. If you want to use your user status in the operational project. Work with Checklist References Use You use this function to create a reference to a checklist template (checklist reference).SAP Online Help degree to which the defined data from the checklist template is changeable when you create a checklist with this template. you must first release them by setting the status to Released. enter a Status Profile Template.09. If you are in a project template. 12. Document template Proceed as described in Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]. you can select the Resolve Reference indicator to specify that the system resolves the checklist reference straight away if an Collaboration Projects 40 . the functions Create Version and Create Version with Template are not available. For this reason. the system resolves the checklist automatically. Prerequisites You created a checklist template [Seite 36]. Result Once you have saved your entries. Features You can display the checklist template in a separate window You can resolve a checklist reference If you are in an operational project you can resolve the reference. Control plan template Enter the data as described in Creating and Opening a Control Plan [Seite 192]. These templates have the initial status Created. You can resolve the reference later on so that you include the checklist with the checklist items in your project. If you want to use them in cProjects.2008 Versioning does not take place for control plan templates. The checklist template is then included in the project structure. The checklist template then becomes the operational checklist in which you can enter operational data.

and checklist items from project templates or checklist templates in operational projects or other templates along with the lower-level project elements that belong to them. the system creates the project roles from the checklist template again by default. Use the search dialog box to choose the project element you require.09. the checklist reference is transferred to the operational project. If several roles exist in the project that have the same role type as that of the checklist template but the name of one role also matches the name of the checklist role. 1.. or checklist item and choose Include. The role attributes from the checklist template. such as the general data.SAP Online Help 12. or staffing are lost when the system transfers the existing project templates. If it is possible to make a unique assignment. 2. qualification requirements. It is possible to make a unique assignment in the following cases: If one role exists in the project that has the same role type as the role in the checklist template. Collaboration Projects 41 . Structure Tree Use The structure tree offers you an overview of your project structure with the project elements [Seite 12]. Procedure . If you do not select the indicator. The Use Project Roles function enables you to specify that project roles that already exist are not created again via the checklist template. In the structure tree in the screen area on the left. The subtrees are copied when you do this. When you resolve checklist references.2008 operational project is created based on this project template. the system does not transfer the existing roles automatically. Result The system then includes the selected project element and all its lower-level elements in the structure tree below or next to the project element currently selected. Select whether you want to create a phase. the system assigns the existing project roles to the project elements of the checklist template instead. select the project element below which or next to which you want to insert a subtree from a template. tasks. If it is not possible to make a unique assignment after you have carried out these checks. This even happens if roles with the same project type and name already exist. 3. task. Including Subtrees from Templates Use You can include phases.

You assign documents (see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]). 4. You enter the basic data for the project definition (see Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition [Seite 43]). You can use pushbuttons to expand or collapse the structure or parts of the structure. the system uses icons [Extern] to display the criticality level of your project elements. 8. 5. 2. Prerequisites You created a project definition (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31]). Collaboration Projects 42 .. you are in change mode. 3. 1. You create roles and assign these to people (see Project Roles [Seite 94]). You can set filters [Seite 63] for project elements. Process Flow . You link objects with the project definition (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). You assign authorizations for the project definition (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). This enables you to see at a glance whether threshold values have been violated. Features The individual project elements are depicted by symbols: Project definition Phase Checklist Checklist item Task If these symbols are filled. You create collaborations (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]). You check the status information for the project element [Seite 257]. 7. You enter the additional data for the project definition (see Creating Additional Data for a Project Definition [Seite 44]). you enter all the data for the project definition.SAP Online Help 12. ). Creation of Data for the Project Definition Purpose In this process. If the symbols are not filled ( you are in display mode.2008 Integration If you schedule evaluations [Seite 231]. You can navigate in the structure and display the data for a project element in the right-hand screen area by clicking on that project element. 9.09. You create a control plan for the project definition (see Creating and Opening a Control Plan [Seite 192]). 6.

For more information about the status and the effects of changing the status. The system changes the current status from Created to Released. In the Language field (upper right-hand corner) you selected the language you want to use for creating language-dependent texts (see also Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]). Enter a Name for your project. The unique. choose the entry Release from the Change Status dropdown box. You must create a project type before you can release a project. 3.. You cannot change the order of the phases either. Select a Reason for Project. 2. The project reason indicates why the project is being created.2008 Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition Prerequisites You created a project definition (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31]) and are in the editing view of this project definition on the Basic Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). 8. Procedure General Area . It does not affect any other settings. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. Enter a Description. The system checks whether the number has been assigned yet. The project is now released for processing (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). Collaboration Projects 43 . You can change this number provided that the project has not yet been transferred to the accounting system. for example. It defines whether the accounting integration [Seite 162] functions are active. 4. see Status of the Project Definition [Seite 250].SAP Online Help 12. If you want to release the project for processing. The priority solely indicates the importance of the project. language-independent Number has been entered by default.09. 6. Once you release the project you can no longer change the project type or the project reason and you cannot delete the project. The name is language-dependent but you can enter a name of your choice. 7. Enter a Priority from 0-9 for the project. 5. Select a Project Type. 1. Specify persons responsible (see Persons Responsible for Project Elements [Extern]). You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]). as required. The description is language-dependent.

For more information about programs.2008 Task That Belongs to Master Project Area This area only appears if the current project is a subproject. If there is a conflict of dates.09. see Work with Programs [Seite 144]. you must trigger scheduling manually. Program Assignments Area This area only appears if the current project is part of a program. You use it to determine. Then the system displays the result in the Calculated Start and Calculated Finish fields. If you have at least display authorization for the program. 2. you can open it in display mode. Dates Area You can also edit the dates in the graphical view [Seite 61] or in the table view [Seite 58]. If you have at least display authorization for the master project it belongs to. see Scheduling [Seite 79].SAP Online Help 12. The system goes straight to the task that represents the subproject in the master project. See also: Creation of Data for the Project Definition [Seite 42] Creating Additional Data for a Project Definition Prerequisites You created a project definition (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31]) and are in the editing view of this project definition on the Additional Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). The system calculates the finish date from the remaining project data during scheduling. If you do not enter any dates. Select the Calendar you want to use for this project. If you already changed the status. for example. 1.. you can open it in display mode by clicking the name. . Collaboration Projects 44 . see Work with Subprojects [Seite 140]. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. For more information about subprojects. whether all weekdays or only working days are taken into consideration. Enter dates in the Fixed Start Date and Fixed Finish Date fields. the system issues an appropriate message. the system automatically carries out scheduling as soon as you perform the next action in the system or press Enter. the system uses the current date as the start date. Provided that the project has the status Created. as required. The calendar influences scheduling. The finish date field remains empty. For more information.

Default Values for Resources Area If you enter an area and a location. Responsible Organizational Unit Area Enter the organizational unit responsible for the project. 3. Enter a search term in the Search Field. the system offers you this data again when you create new project roles.SAP Online Help 12. or select it using the function [Seite 26]. You can change this information for each project role. If you change the required capacity distribution unit. Enter the Sold-to Party Number and the Customer Number. You can select the grouping of your choice. The distribution unit and period type you enter here form the basis for the distribution of required capacity [Seite 100]. This can lead to rounding errors in particular if the new unit is significantly larger than the old one. for example. It is an additional search criterion in the search function for finding a project. changing the unit from day to year. search The organizational unit can be used to determine organizational data for costing (see Costing Logic [Seite 164] and Derivation of Organizational Data [Seite 168]). or select a number using the search function [Seite 26]. as required. The field is only ready for input once the project has been released.09. The system transfers the numbers to the Sold-to Party or Customer fields accordingly. If you activated time recording for the project definition in the Define Project Types activity in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. The system also uses the search term as an additional search criterion in the search function. Furthermore. 4. 2. if required. See also: Creation of Data for the Project Definition [Seite 42] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Collaboration Projects 45 . you check who created and changed the project and when. if required.. the system adjusts the distribution values of the project roles accordingly. the Confirmation field is also active on the Additional Data tab page. Grouping allows you to group together projects in one category.2008 Procedure Advanced Area . Enter a Grouping. 1. Administration Area Here you see which project template the project is based on and who the person responsible for the template is.

You create an approval (see Creating an Approval [Seite 237]).SAP Online Help 12... You create collaborations (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]). The name is language-dependent but you can enter a name of your choice. In the Language field (upper right-hand corner) you selected the language you want to use for creating language-dependent texts (see also Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]). Creating Basic Data for a Phase Prerequisites You created a phase in a project (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the editing view of this phase on the Basic Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). Prerequisites You created a phase (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]). The unique.2008 Creation of Data for a Phase Purpose In this process. 2. 3. Procedure General Area . You assign documents (see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]). language-independent number has been entered by default. 8. Enter a Name for the phase. the latest by which it must be available is when the approval is started. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]). You assign authorizations for the phase (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). However. Process Flow . 4. 2. You enter the additional data for the phase (see Creating Additional Data for a Phase [Seite 48]). 6. however. Select a Phase Type. 5. 1. You check the Status Information for Project Element [Seite 257]. 7. you can change it. You enter the basic data for the phase (see Creating Basic Data for a Phase [Seite 46]). you enter all the data for the phase.09. 1. Collaboration Projects 46 . You cannot create the approval until later. You link objects with the phase (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]).

The description is language-dependent. Select the Calendar you want to use for this task. other existing checklist references are resolved and the tasks that belong to the phase are released for editing. For more information about the status and the effects of changing the status. Specify persons responsible (see Persons Responsible for Project Elements [Extern]). you can no longer change the phase type. 4. you see them in the structure tree [Seite 41]. Specify whether the phase has a Predecessor Phase in the dropdown box. 12. The field is relevant or taken into account only if you have not entered a date or have only entered one date in the Fixed Start Date and Fixed Finish Date fields.. as required. The current date is entered for both dates by default in the standard system. If you want to release the phase for editing. Dates Area You can also edit the dates in the graphical view [Seite 61] or in the table view [Seite 58]. 4. This releases the phase for editing (see Editing Project Structures [Extern]). 5. see Scheduling [Seite 79]. Select constraints.09. 3. If you make changes to the order.2008 You use this setting to determine the order of the phases. You cannot change the order of the phases or delete the phase either. For more information. The system allows you to select phases from all phases that have already been created. Enter a Description. Select No Predecessor for the first phase. 3. Once you have released the phase. as required. Enter a Duration. Enter a start date and a finish date. as required. The fields are only ready for input if you selected the Must start on or Must finish on constraint. 1. 2. see Status of Phases [Seite 252]. Otherwise the system calculates the duration automatically.SAP Online Help You must create a phase type before you can release a phase. At the same time. . 6. See also: Creation of Data for a Phase [Seite 46] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Collaboration Projects 47 . The system changes the current status from Created to Released. choose the entry Release from the Change Status field.

. whether all weekdays or only working days are taken into consideration. In the standard system. if required. the same calendar is used for the phase and the project definition. 1. 1. Administration Area Here you see who created and changed the phase on which date.SAP Online Help 12.. if required. you enter all the data for the checklist. Grouping allows you to group together phases in one category. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. if required. Collaboration Projects 48 . Procedure Advanced Area . See also: Creation of Data for a Phase [Seite 46] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Creating Data for a Checklist Purpose In this process.. It is an additional search criterion in the search function for finding a phase. If you want to use a different calendar select it here. Enter a Grouping. The system also uses the search term as an additional search criterion in the search function.09.2008 Creating Additional Data for a Phase Prerequisites You have created a phase (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the maintenance view of this phase on the Additional Data tab page. Prerequisites You created a checklist (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]). Process Flow . You enter the basic data for the checklist (see Creating Basic Data for a Checklist [Seite 49]). Enter a search term in the Search Field. The calendar influences scheduling. You can select the grouping of your choice. for example. Select the Calendar you want to use for this project. 2. You use it to determine. 3..

3. Once you have released the checklist. The system changes the current status from Created to Released. You assign authorizations for the checklist (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). The name is language-dependent but you can enter a name of your choice.. Enter a name for the checklist. 3. You link objects with the checklist (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). Creating Basic Data for a Checklist Prerequisites You created a checklist (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the editing view of this checklist on the Basic Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). You cannot delete the checklist either. You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]). choose the entry Release in the Change Status field. Select a checklist type. The description is language-dependent. 5. see Status of Checklists [Seite 254]. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. as required. you can no longer change the checklist type.2008 2. 4.09.SAP Online Help 12. Enter a description. You enter the additional data for the checklist (see Creating Additional Data for a Checklist [Seite 50]). In the Language field (upper right-hand corner) you selected the language you want to use for creating language-dependent texts (see also Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]). 5. You create collaborations (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]). If you want to release the checklist for processing. 7. Procedure General Area . 2. The unique. The checklist is now released for processing (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). Collaboration Projects 49 . However. you can change it. 6. 4. Specify persons responsible (see Persons Responsible for Project Elements [Extern]). You assign documents (see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]). 1. You must enter a checklist type before you can release a checklist. language-independent number has been entered by default. You check the Status Information for Project Element [Seite 257]. For more information about the status and the effects of changing the status.

The system displays the extent to which the checklist can be modified in the Changeability field. You can select the grouping of your choice. Grouping allows you to group together checklists in one category. See also: Creating Data for a Checklist [Seite 48] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Creating Data for a Checklist Item Purpose In this process. if required. Administration Area Here you see which checklist templates you used to create a checklist and the person responsible for the template. if required.09. Here you check who resolved. Enter a Grouping. created.. Procedure Advanced Area . It is an additional search criterion in the search function for finding a checklist. and changed the checklist and when. Collaboration Projects 50 .2008 See also: Creating Data for a Checklist [Seite 48] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Creating Additional Data for a Checklist Prerequisites You have created a checklist (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the maintenance view of this checklist on the Additional Data tab page. 1. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. you enter all the data for the checklist item. the system uses the search term as an additional search criterion in the search function. see Changeability [Extern].SAP Online Help 12. In addition to grouping. 2. Enter a search term in the Search Field. For more information. 3.

3. When you create a checklist item the system enters the sort number according to its position in the checklist. Creating Basic Data for a Checklist Item Prerequisites You created a checklist item (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the editing view of this checklist item on the Basic Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). Procedure General Area . You enter the basic data for the checklist item (see Creating Basic Data for a Checklist Item [Seite 51]). A process is independent of a phase in terms of time and can extend across phase boundaries. Specify persons responsible (see Persons Responsible for Project Elements [Extern]). as required. by default. 5. 6. You link objects with the checklist item (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). enter a sort number that lies between the sort numbers of the existing items. 2. Collaboration Projects 51 . You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]). Process Flow . 1. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. 7. Change the Sort Number. You enter the additional data for the checklist item (see Creating Additional Data for a Checklist Item [Seite 52]). The name is language-dependent but you can enter a name of your choice. 3.09. as required. 2.. Enter a Description. Select the Process to which the checklist item belongs. You assign documents (see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]). You create collaborations (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]).SAP Online Help 12. 4.. 4. 5. Enter a Name for the checklist item. If you want to position a checklist item between two existing items. You assign authorizations for the checklist item (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]).2008 Prerequisites You created a checklist item (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]). You can use the process in the evaluations. You check the Status Information for Project Element [Seite 257]. In the Language field (upper right-hand corner) you selected the language you want to use for creating language-dependent texts (see also Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]). 1.

You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. you can only complete the phase to which the checklist item belongs if the checklist item has the status Finished. Enter a finish date. Select a constraint for the finish date. see Scheduling [Seite 79]. . Collaboration Projects 52 . Procedure Advanced Area .. 1. 2. 1.SAP Online Help The description is language-dependent. 12. If the checklist item must be finished so that the phase to which it belongs can be approved. set the Mandatory indicator.2008 6. as required. Enter a Grouping. See also: Creating Data for a Checklist Item [Seite 50] Confirming Checklist Items [Seite 89] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Creating Additional Data for a Checklist Item Prerequisites You have created a checklist item (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the maintenance view of this checklist item on the Additional Data tab page. if required. choose the entry Release from the Change Status field. Dates Area You can also edit the dates in the graphical view [Seite 61] or in the table view [Seite 58]. This field is only ready for input if you have chosen the Must finish on constraint. In this case.. indicator. 2. The system changes the current status from Created to Released. 3.09. For more information about the status and the effects of changing the status. If you want to release the checklist item for processing. The checklist item is now released for processing (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). For more information. If completion of the checklist item is mandatory. You cannot delete the checklist item now. see Status of Checklist Items [Seite 255]. select the Relev. for App.

Enter a value for the severity (see FMEA [Extern]). Prerequisites You created a task (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]). The three FMEA fields are ready for input once the checklist item has the status Released. you enter all the data for the task.09. The system also uses the search term as an additional search criterion in the search function. Set the changeability [Extern] of the checklist item..SAP Online Help 12.2008 Grouping allows you to group together checklist items in one category. Confirmation Area . You can select the grouping of your choice. 3. Collaboration Projects 53 . 4. detection. if required. 4. Process Flow . 1. 5. Enter a value for the occurrence (see FMEA [Extern]). You assign documents (see Assigning Documents and Creating Folders [Seite 198]). the system displays the product of the description. 5. 6. 3. Leave the Result field as it is. 2. Administration Area Here you see who created and changed the checklist item on which date. The field becomes relevant once you confirm the checklist item [Seite 89]. 1. You enter the additional data for the task (see Creating Additional Data for a Task [Seite 55]). Enter a value for the detection (see FMEA [Extern]). It is an additional search criterion in the search function for finding a checklist item. Enter a search term in the Search Field. See also: Creating Data for a Checklist Item [Seite 50] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Creation of Data for a Task Purpose In this process. 4. You enter the basic data for the task (see Creating Basic Data for a Task [Seite 54]). In the Risk Priority Number field. 2. The field is ready for input once the checklist item has the status Released. You check the status information for the project element [Seite 257].. The field becomes relevant once you confirm the checklist item [Seite 89]. and occurrence values (see FMEA [Extern]). Leave the Actual Finish Date field empty.

Procedure General Area . 3. enter a sort number that lies between the sort numbers of the existing tasks. You create collaborations (see Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219]). The name is language-dependent but you can enter a name of your choice. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. 6. In the Language field (upper right-hand corner) you selected the language you want to use for creating language-dependent texts (see also Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]). for example. This person does not have to carry out the task. You assign authorizations for the tasks (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). 5. You enter the qualifications necessary for completing the task (see Defining Qualifications [Seite 109]).09. 9. 12. 2. You can use the process in the evaluations. Specify persons responsible (see Persons Responsible for Project Elements [Extern]). Enter a Name for the task. the system enters the sort number according to the position of the task. A process is independent of a phase in terms of time and can extend across phase boundaries. 4. Collaboration Projects 54 . Change the Sort Number. You assign the project participants who have to complete the task on the Roles tab page (see Assignment of Project Roles to Tasks [Seite 106]) or in the Resources area on the Tasks tab page (see Task Assignment [Seite 102]). You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]).. You must enter a task type before you can release a task. If you want to position a task between two existing tasks. Creating Basic Data for a Task Prerequisites You created a task (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the editing view of this task on the Basic Data tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]).SAP Online Help 5. Select the Process to which the task belongs. 1. When you create a task. You define the relationships of the task (see Editing the Relationship Between Tasks [Seite 78]).2008 8. You link objects with the task (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). Select a Task Type. Enter a Description. you can enter a person responsible on an organizational level. 7. as required. while the actual project participants are responsible for completing the task. as required. 6.

see Work with Subprojects [Seite 140]. Otherwise the system calculates the duration automatically. For more information. For more information about the status and the effects of changing the status. The field is relevant or taken into account only if you have not entered a date or have only entered one date in the Fixed Start Date and Fixed Finish Date fields. 4. 3.09. For more information. . See also: Creation of Data for a Task [Seite 53] Confirming Tasks [Seite 89] Creating Additional Data for a Task Prerequisites You have created a task (see Creating Project Elements [Seite 32]) and are in the maintenance view of this task on the Additional Data tab page. Dates Area You can also edit the dates in the graphical view [Seite 61] or in the table view [Seite 58]. The fields are only ready for input if you selected the Must start on or Must finish on constraint. Enter a subproject. You cannot delete the task either.2008 8. 2. The system changes the current status from Created to Released. If you want to release the task for processing. you can no longer change the task type. Select the Calendar you want to use for this task. Select constraints. 7. as required.SAP Online Help The description is language-dependent. 1. as required. see Scheduling [Seite 79]. Collaboration Projects 55 . 12. see Status of Tasks [Seite 254]. The task is now released for processing (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). choose the entry Release from the Change Status field.. Enter a start date and a finish date. Enter a Duration. Once you have released the task. as required.

the icon is used.. Grouping allows you to group together tasks in one category. 2. Enter the work you have planned for the completion of the task. If the task must be completed so that the phase to which it belongs can be approved. Enter a search term in the Search Field. You can select the grouping of your choice.2008 You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. The system also uses the search term as an additional search criterion in the search function. 3. The work you enter for subtasks does not depend on the work for the superior task: The work for all tasks is additive. These icon in the structure tree of the table and graphical tasks can be identified by the view if you are in display mode. if required. You can use this information in the evaluations. See also: Creation of Data for a Task [Seite 53] Editing Project Structures [Seite 56] Editing Project Structures Collaboration Projects 56 . 1. Procedure Advanced Area . They are ready for input once the task has the status Released.SAP Online Help 12. 6. If you are in change mode. It is an additional search criterion in the search function for finding a task. select the Relev. Set the Milestone indicator if the task is a milestone. and choose a unit from the dropdown box. 4. for App. 5. Enter a Grouping. If the task must be completed urgently. Administration Area Here you see who created and changed the task on which date.09. In this case. indicator. Tasks that are milestones can be identified by the icon in the graphical view. if required. you can only complete the phase to which the task belongs if the task has the status Completed. Confirmation Area The fields in this area only become relevant once you confirm a task [Seite 89]. set the Mandatory indicator.

and paste project elements using the appropriate pushbuttons when editing project structures. choose Position to position the structure tree in such a way that a selected project element appears at the top. Process Basic Functions Recording Changes Archiving Graphical View Multilingual Capabilities Printing an Object Lock Logic Table View Workflow Project Planning Editing a Project Element Deletion of Objects Editing the Relationship Between Tasks Scheduling Collaboration Projects 57 . You can paste the selected project element multiple times but the selection is reset when you change views. the time the system requires for each further action. To display the rest of the structure above the selected element again afterwards. see SAP Note 976787. This function is only available if you are in a checklist because checklist items can only be found below checklists. Recommendation When working with large projects. Example You have cut a checklist item and want to paste it somewhere else. we recommend that you only expand the project elements or subtrees in the structure tree that you require for immediate editing because the response time of the system increases with the number of expanded project elements.2008 General Functions for Editing Project Structures If you have administration authorization for a project. End of the example. for example.SAP Online Help 12.09. If you have fully or almost fully expanded the project structure. graphical view. End of the recommendation. when you change from the detail view to the table view or when you mark the project element as a focus object. For more information. you can scroll to the top of the structure. Each pushbutton is only active if it is possible to carry out the function for the project element you are processing in the structure. may increase. for example. or multi-project monitor. switching to the detail view. To get a clearer view. you can cut. copy. table view.

2008 Confirmation Confirming Checklist Items Confirming Tasks Basic Functions Table View Use A table view is available in addition to a graphical view and a detail view. for editing projects. depending on which initial view you are in: Initial View Projects Templates Approvals Finish date constraint and finish date Responsible role Responsible resource Status Priority Grouping Search field Process Milestone indicator Relevant for Approval indicator Mandatory indicator Modifiable Data Name Start date constraint and start date Collaboration Projects 58 . Here you can enter and edit the following project data.09.SAP Online Help Releasing Project Elements Import and Export of Data 12.

see SAP Note 972339. or checklist item for editing.09. The number refers only to the corresponding documents.SAP Online Help 12. Features Along with other data. and not the lower-level elements. template. collaborations. Prerequisites You opened a project.2008 Tasks Name Percentage complete Work Start date constraint and start date Finish date constraint and finish date Status Priority Grouping Search field Process Milestone indicator Relevant for Approval indicator Mandatory indicator Checklist items Name Result Finish date constraint and finish date Status Priority Grouping Search field Process Mandatory indicator You can display additional or customer-defined columns in the table view. and objects of the project element on a given level. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. and objects are assigned to the project elements of the current project. task. you see here how many documents. For more information. collaborations. Collaboration Projects 59 .

or objects. See also: Working with the Table View [Seite 60] . Make the required changes. 1. in which you can use the standard functions of the ABAP List Viewer (ALV) in addition. choose Table in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. 3. Personalizing the Table View . Working with the Table View Opening the Table View . Expand a project element as required.09. To open the tabular project view. and exporting. by positioning your mouse pointer on it and choosing Expand Subtree. 1. such as setting the filter. you can do the following by choosing the Settings link: Add or remove columns Sort columns Define filters for the individual columns Adjust the table display (for example. sorting. 4. Save your entries. you can branch to the detail view. collaborations. Features In the list view. Collaboration Projects 60 . 2.SAP Online Help 12.. Click the secondary mouse button. printing.2008 By clicking the number of documents. Choose which columns are to be visible in the table and the order in which the system is to display them. you cannot perform any actions here that change the structure. change the format of the paper) Since the list view cannot display a structure. such as create.. List View Use You can switch from the table view to a list view. 2.. change the design of the table) Modify print versions (for example.

In the standard system. Prerequisites You opened a project.2008 Graphical View Along with the table view and the detail view. If you want to create a title for the printout. a graphical view is available in the form of a Gantt chart for you to use when processing projects.SAP Online Help 12. You can obtain information about the project element by positioning your mouse on the bar. Expand to Level 2). template. The view does not contain the dates from the object links. Features General Functions You can choose which view of the calendar you want the system to display in the graphic from the View dropdown box. By moving. Note You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. The setting you make is automatically saved and applies the next time you call the graphic. you can create relationships between two tasks. Collaboration Projects 61 . You can change the order of the other columns using drag and drop and you can change the width of all columns. Furthermore. End of the note. If you selected the Overview view. or checklist item for editing. The Print Preview button allows you to set print parameters and display the current appearance of the graphic for printing. the linked SAP objects are displayed as separate bars. as well as the duration of a project element. lengthening. The Navigate button allows you to specify the section of the project you want the graphic to display. In the table part of the graphic.09. you can change the header of the graphical view. Display If you use object links and have specified a date type in the user settings. task. You can restrict the expansion of the subtrees to certain levels by selecting the required level in the Expand Subtree dropdown box (for example. you can change the start and finish dates. When you select a project element in the structure. You can also specify in the user settings which columns are displayed in the table part of the graphic. the entire duration of the project and all displayed rows are printed. The changes are automatically saved for your user. the system automatically positions the calendar in such a way that the start of the project element appears at the left edge. or shortening the bar. the system automatically uses the calendar view that best suits the duration of the project. The system expands all subtrees of the project structure in the structure tree by default. You use the Print button to print the current project. the column with the project hierarchy is always displayed on the left.

If you use the constraints finish no earlier than or finish no later than.SAP Online Help Tasks you marked as milestones are indicated by (Milestone). You can reduce the duration of the task. If both constraints are set. Checklists do not appear in the graphic. the system automatically sets the constraint must start on if the constraint must finish on has not already been set. Note If the constraint must finish on is set. Collaboration Projects 62 . the system updates the start date of the project element when it moves it. End of the example. 12. Checklist items are marked by Item). (Checklist Editing Project Elements You can change the duration by selecting the date bar and lengthening or shortening it whilst holding down the mouse button. The system calculates the duration of the project element automatically from the start and finish dates. You can change the duration within the time frame of the constraint dates. Changing the duration here has the same effect as changing the duration in the detail view. If the constraints must start on or must finish on are set for the start and finish dates. You can move a project element without changing the duration by placing the mouse pointer on the bar and moving the bar to the left or right holding down the mouse button. the system updates the finish date of the project element when it moves it. End of the note. If the task is only part of the critical path due to the must start on or must finish on constraints. If the constraint must start on is set. These are displayed in red unless they have already been marked as milestones. You can determine the percentage complete of a task by looking at the degree to which the corresponding bar in the graphic is filled. When you increase the duration of a task. the system updates the start date and the finish date of the project element when it moves it. the system permits a maximum of the duration specified by the constraint on the finish date. to 30 days. as described above. Tasks with duration 0 are represented in the same way in the graphic as tasks with duration 1. you can only adjust the duration by changing the constraint dates.2008 Tasks whose buffer is less than or equal to 0 are part of the critical path. When you move a project element. Example The following constraints are defined for a task: Must start on January 26 and finish no later than March 11. for example.09. it is displayed in yellow. you can only adjust the duration in line with the constraints that are set. duration 46 days.

2. and system status. or tasks. the system only filters the checklist by the condition project element name. Here. Select the project element you want to filter with its lower-level elements. from the table view. Open a project. The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case.09. o After creation. If you set the filter for the object type checklist. detail view. for example. To do this. Procedure 1. phases.SAP Online Help 12. you can change the link type in the context menu of the relationship. 4. Enter a generic character string as the project element name. 3. Since mirrored tasks do not have all the attributes of a task. Note If you set the filter for the object type tasks. the system only filters the task by the conditions project element name. You can use the standard wildcard characters here. projects. You can call the filter function from all views in the cProjects application. or graphical view. Collaboration Projects 63 . Choose Set Filter. choose Graphic. Select the object types you want to include. the system also takes mirrored tasks into account. choose one of the following options: o Choose the Create Relationship node in the context menu of the bar that is to be the predecessor in the relationship and pull the joining line to the start of the successor with the mouse button held down. The system then filters the project element you selected along with its lower-level elements. To delete a relationship. Setting the Filter You can set a filter with certain conditions for project elements. Hold the Alt key down and pull a joining line from the predecessor to the successor. You can create a relationship. use the context menu or choose Remove. for example. the system also takes checklist references into account. The type of relationship can only be changed once the link to the subsequent task has been created. from the tree structure. time frame. Activities To open the graphical view.2008 You can also change the dates by selecting a project element in the structure and choosing Specify Dates or by setting the constraints and dates in the table part of the graphical view. The character * represents any character string and the character + stands for any character. End of the note.

xyz". select a person or business partner who is responsible for the project elements to be filtered. "Project A". Enter a generic character string for the group and search field. Under Responsible. End of the note.2008 Example If you enter Proj*. 8. The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case. If you set the filter for tasks and/or checklist items. You can use the search help to do this by searching for the person or business partner by their role. "Project B". Choose Cancel if you do not want to start the filter function. Select one or more values for the criticality level. If you choose Reset Filter. The filter result then contains all the project elements whose responsible role belongs to the project role type selected here. The character * represents any character string and the character + stands for any character. 10. or "proj. You can use the standard wildcard characters here. 12. 9. 5. The dropdown list contains system statuses and customer statuses from the status profiles that are used in the project structure. Select one or more values for the status. The system then displays the following fields that you can use to define additional filter conditions: Milestone Task Type Collaboration Projects 64 . for example. End of the example. 7.SAP Online Help 12. the system filters by all project elements whose names start with "Proj". as required. the system shows attributes that you can only set for these two object types. 13. 11. 6. Select the responsible project role type you require. Select one or more values for the priority. user. The system then displays the following fields that you can use to define additional filter conditions: Process Mandatory Relevant for Approval If you set the filter for tasks. Select a start and finish date for the time frame. or name. the system resets the filter to the initial conditions. Note The filter condition time frame is not relevant to checklists or checklist references because these project elements do not have any dates. Choose Apply to start the filter function.09. the system shows attributes that you can only set for tasks. The system uses the earliest or latest dates that are defined in the user settings to calculate the start and finish dates. The system then displays all projects in the filter result whose time frame (calculated start date to calculated finish date) is partly or completely within the time frame specified.

The system retains the previous filter conditions. r ult ox Choose Apply if y o w ant t ous e the s u elec ted conditi ons f or t he curr ent filter. the system displays them in a list box. the system displays the non-filtered view with all project elements again. Choose Set Filter. ha e d The system copies the current settings and displays them. It does not apply to the project element currently selected in the filter result. Choose Apply if you want to use the selected conditions for the current filter. o t t rr r ns o t o Changing Filters 1. If you have already saved more than one filter. Choose Set Filter. which you can refine. the filter result is displayed within the Gantt chart. Change the filter conditions as required. The defined filters are user-specific. 2. s crip tion o t he S ave as D efa S etting che ckb . The filter function applies to the same project elements as were previously filtered: the project element you originally selected along with its lower-level elements. . Procedure Defining Filters Choose Set Filt er. Collaboration Projects 65 .. 5. Choose Save A s. You can return to the table view from the ALV list by choosing Structure View. sc e Select th eS ave as Def ault Se tting c h eck box ify ou w an t o us e his filter b d efault. Select or c nge th s elect e filt er conditio ns. If you have already saved more than one filter. 3. You can further restrict the result as required by choosing Set Filter again. the system displays the Delete Filter button on the result screen and you can use this to reset the filter conditions. Choose Prop ertie s if y ou want t o di pl ay th efilte r d es . 4. Saving the Filter You can save the filter conditions you set so that you can use them again by default. If you have already saved more than one filter. The system copies the current settings and displays them. You can define and save multiple filters. Deleting Filters 1. Choose Cancel if you want to return to your current filter conditions and do not want to apply the saved conditions. t t y Choose O to s avet he filt er K . Choose Canc el if y u wan t o ret urn o yo ur c u ent filte condi tio and d not w an t o ap ply th e saved c onditi ns.09. Select the filter that you want to change. If you choose Delete Filter or you go to the detail view or table view. the system displays them in a list box. Choose Save. Enter a de riptio nof the filt r . the system displays them in a list box.2008 Result If you called the filter from the detail view or table view.. If you have defined a filter. If you called the filter from the graphical view (Gantt chart). Choose Setting s. You can use the filter function in the ALV list to restrict the result further if necessary. the filter result is displayed as an ALV list in a popup. A dialog box appears. 6.SAP Online Help Percentage Complete 12..

09. or options by choosing Print Parameters. language. 5. 3. Procedure ..2008 If a filter is set as default. Change the print options for the individual objects. Note 12. 3. This applies to all sessions. You opened an object to edit or display. 2. Choose Settings. Workflow Use cProjects offers you a workflow function when you make certain changes to project elements. Print the document. 1. Delete the filter. 4. 4. The Adobe Acrobat Reader® or the corresponding plug-in is installed. You have authorization to edit or display the object. Choose Preview. Collaboration Projects 66 . Printing an Object Use You can print objects in cProjects using the printing functions in the Adobe Acrobat Reader®.SAP Online Help 2. Integration The workflow is linked to a recorded change [Seite 73] or a change in status (see Status Management [Seite 250]). You can change the print template. Select a language. Select a print template. as required. End of the note. Prerequisites Your system administrator defined a print template for the object. Choose Print. 6. The system formats the template and displays it in Adobe Acrobat Reader®. the system always uses these filter conditions when you use the filter function. Select the filter that you want to delete.

Furthermore. For more information. or if a phase is ready to be approved. Collaboration Projects 67 . Alerts Use Alerts [Extern] are sent in the following project situations: Once all the tasks in a checklist item have been completed or once all the checklist items in a checklist have been finished. the person responsible for processing it receives a message by e-mail that the project element needs to be processed. alerts can be sent for project elements and object links if the severity has been set manually or if a threshold value violation exists for a subobject. see the “Features” section of the following topics: Work with Subprojects [Seite 140] Work with Mirrored Tasks [Seite 142] Work with Programs [Seite 144] Your system administrator can configure the system so that one or more persons responsible receive an alert message if there is a threshold value violation for one of the following objects: Project element Object link Assignment Staffing Business partner Project participant In addition. The e-mail contains a link to the corresponding project element. the person responsible for the checklist item or checklist receives an alert message informing him or her of this.09. your system administrator can make other workflows available.SAP Online Help 12. The alert recipient depends on the type of inter-project link.2008 Features You can use the workflow function for the following project elements when the status is changed : Tasks Checklist items Phases Projects Once the project leader releases one of these elements. Alerts are sent if you create an inter-project link in Multi-Project Management. If required. you receive an e-mail informing you if changes have been made to a project element for which you are responsible.

. Features The following information applies to alerts triggered by threshold value violations and severities. Prerequisites You system administrator made the necessary settings for sending alert messages. If there is no person responsible for the task: the project lead Staffing If the staffing process has the status In Process: Staffing manager or responsible candidate manager if known. .com/instguides Installation and Upgrade Guides mySAP Business Suite Solutions mySAP PLM in the section entitled “Making Settings for Alerts”. Task responsible 2.09.2008 For more information on severities and threshold value violations. If not known: all responsible staffing managers or candidate managers of the organizational unit assigned to the staffing process For all other statuses: Project lead Business partner Project participant Project lead See recipient for staffing Collaboration Projects 68 . Integration Sending alerts does not depend on the status of an object. Determining the Recipient The following table shows which recipients receive alerts for different objects: Object Project definition Phase Task Checklist Checklist item Object link Assignment Alert Recipient Project lead Phase responsible and decision maker Task responsible and persons who staff the project roles for this task Checklist responsible Checklist item responsible Person responsible for project element that the object link belongs to.SAP Online Help 12..sap. see Evaluations [Seite 231]. Project versions and templates do not trigger alerts. see SAP Service Marketplace at service. 1. For more information.

Resources tab page The system selects the relevant project role automatically. the system cannot send an e-mail even if you have specified an e-mail address for the business partner. the system checks whether you have authorization for this object. Content and Language of an Alert Message An alert contains a standard message which informs you of the reason for the alert. The system only uses the business partner’s e-mail address if no user has been assigned to the business partner.SAP Online Help 12. for example. it does not send an alert. specify a different recipient. Project participant Project definition. If the business partner’s user does not have an address. Resources tab page The language of an alert message depends on how the alert is sent: Collaboration Projects 69 . Resources tab page The system selects the relevant project role automatically. When you open the object. If the system cannot determine a recipient that meets these requirements.2008 If a user is assigned to the business partner. Assignment Business partner Task or project role depending on the secondary object type Project definition. the system uses this user’s e-mail address.09. Your system administrator can make certain changes using the DPR_ALERTS BAdI. The following table shows where each of the links leads to: Object Project element Object link Target of the URL Current project element Project element that the object link belongs to. A user who sets a severity manually does not receive an alert. Staffing Project definition. Object Links tab page The system selects the relevant object link automatically. This could be: A threshold value violation that was checked automatically A threshold value that was set manually An aggregation of the threshold value violations of a lower-level project element You can open the object in question via a link.

You can edit tasks and checklist items in parallel. Prerequisites You defined text languages in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Specify Text Languages. to plan the dates for the whole project. If you edit checklist. Time at which the Alert Is Sent Alerts are checked and sent each time you save the project or create an evaluation. Collaboration Projects 70 . without creating a lock conflict. If the alert is sent to the e-mail address of the business partner. If no language has been entered here. Multilingual Capabilities Use cProjects distinguishes between application languages [Extern] and text languages [Extern]. the system also locks the phase. One of these text languages is the default language [Extern]. You can continue to edit the project definition and other phases provided that you do not make any changes to them that also affect the locked phase. This allows multiple users to confirm various tasks or checklist items in the system at the same time. the system uses the language of the relevant business partner. If the approval causes the status of the phase to change. the logon language applies. If no language has been entered or if this language has not been installed. the system also locks the project definition. you only lock the approval that the individual approval belongs to. the original language of the current project applies. This enables multiple decision makers to process their individual approvals simultaneously. Lock Logic Use cProjects supports efficient execution of projects by using the following lock logic: When you edit a project all dependent project elements are locked. or control plan templates. the language is the same as the language from the user master data. project. You can continue to edit all other project elements at this stage: If the individual approval causes the status of the approval to change. If you are editing a task or a checklist item in a project. Not all application languages are text languages. You can only enter texts in cProjects in these languages. all dependent elements are locked. for example.09. If you process an individual approval.2008 If you send an alert to a user name. This enables the project lead. for example. you also lock the phase that the project element belongs to.SAP Online Help 12.

you can use the appropriate pushbutton to specify that the original language of the template is also the original language for the new project or template. project template. If no parameter has been specified in the URL. the default language is used. the original language of the project is English and the checklist template only contains German texts. the original language of the project also becomes the original language for the checklist and the checklist elements. saplanguage=DE).09. You can also select an original language of your choice. Text Language You can enter the texts for a project in any of the languages you specified in Customizing. Collaboration Projects 71 . Opening objects In the user settings you make the default setting for whether you want to open objects in the logon language or in the original language: Logon language If the logon language is not a permitted text language.2008 Application Language You can log on to cProjects in various languages. the system sets the logon language as the original language. The original language applies to the whole project or template – all project elements have the same original language. or checklist template without a template and the logon language is a permitted text language. project template. The system first attempts to determine the application language using the language parameter in the cProjects URL (for example. project templates. the corresponding text fields are blank. the German texts are copied and are displayed for both the text language German and text language English. Resolving checklist references in operational projects When you resolve checklist references. they are opened in the logon language provided that this is a permitted text language. Original language when creating objects without a template If you create a project. If the logon language is not a permitted text language. the system uses the language settings in your browser to determine the application language. the checklist template can contain project elements for which no text has been entered in the original language of the project. the system provides an original language [Extern]. the user settings in the back-end system apply. The following texts in cProjects are language-dependent: Project element name Project element description Name of responsible project role If no texts exist in the text language currently set. Original language If you open several objects with different original languages. the object is opened in the default language. or checklist template with a template. If. Original language when creating objects with a template If you create a project. When you create projects. the system copies the texts in the original language of the checklist template when it resolves the reference. for example. If no texts exist in the default language. If the checklist template has a different original language to the project. You cannot change the original language once the objects have been created. If this language is not permitted. If no language has been entered there either. the system sets the default language. the text fields are blank.SAP Online Help 12. Otherwise the same conditions apply as for creating objects without a template. If this is the case. or checklist templates. simulation version. The system transfers the texts in all existing languages.

2. Check whether your cProjects URL contains a language parameter (for example. saplanguage=DE). See also: Using Language-Dependent Functions [Seite 72] Using Language-Dependent Functions Changing the Logon Language . see Multilingual Capabilities [Seite 70]. The system displays the original text in a special area. The system hides the Original Language pushbutton.SAP Online Help Required-entry-field check for language-dependent fields 12. If so. Show the original text by choosing Original Language. a.09. Collaboration Projects 72 . Note that the browser language then only applies if the URL does not specify a language..2008 Here.. Add the language you require to the list. If you change the language afterwards. Translate the text in the General area. change the logon language using the language settings in your browser. Move the language you want to log on in to the first position in the list. Entering and Translating Language-Dependent Texts If you want to create or display texts in a different language. proceed as follows: .. to sap-language=EN). c. Choose Tools Internet Options Languages. 1. If you want to translate the language-dependent text in a project element into another language. For more information. If your cProjects URL does not contain a language parameter. the system does not carry out any more checks. the system only checks whether you made the entries in the original language with which the project was opened. you must first exit the application and log on again before the new settings take effect. 4. use this parameter to change the language (for example. choose the required language in the maintenance view of an object from the Language dropdown box (upper right-hand corner). If you are already logged on. d. b. 2. 1. Close the original text by choosing No Display from the Language dropdown box in the area where the original text is located. 3. Select the target language in the Language field. We recommend that you use the URL parameter if you want to change the language for a short amount of time and adjust your browser settings if you need to change the language long term. You cannot edit this text. Proceed as follows in the Microsoft® Internet Explorer: .

the recording option must be active for projects. Prerequisites Your system administrator has activated the recording changes option for the individual objects in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. You have selected the Display Change Documents indicator in the user settings on the General tab page. are not displayed on the Change Documents tab page.2008 Recording Changes cProjects provides you with a means of recording changes that you can activate for the following objects: Checklist templates Project templates Projects Control plans Control plan templates Integration The change documents trigger a workflow. you want to record changes to project roles. changes you make to dependent objects are also recorded. approvals. You need administration authorization for an object to be able to see the changes recorded for the object. If. for example. for projects. such as notes for a staffing. by choosing Activate Change Documents.09. checklists. but also records the changes to dependent objects such as the phases. Collaboration Projects 73 .SAP Online Help 12. End of the caution. For example. Features If the option for recording changes is active for an object. the system not only records changes you make to the project itself. You can display a selection of the changes made within a certain period of time for all project elements as well as for checklist templates and project templates. and project roles. This function is on the Change Documents tab page. Caution Change documents with long text fields.

From the status Released onwards. you can only delete projects and templates by archiving them first. Prerequisites To display a project or a template that has already been archived. Activities To flag a project for archiving. and control plan templates. The system saves the text with your name. Collaboration Projects 74 . it remains in your favorites list after archiving. Features You save a note by saving the project. You can also add an archived project listed in a search result list to your favorites list. Features You can archive projects as well as project. You can call it from the favorites list directly. If you add a project to your favorites list before you archive it. by assigning the user to a user group or organization that holds read authorization for the archived project. To display a project that was already archived. As the user. call it by choosing it from the search [Seite 26] (search using Archive) result list or the favorites list. you must have read authorization for the archived object. Prerequisites You have change authorization for the project element or resource. set the To Be Archived status. see Printing an Object [Seite 66]. and the date and time it was created.SAP Online Help 12. Your system administrator carries out archiving. you can grant a user read authorization for an archived project at a later point in time.09. You can only flag templates for archiving that have the status Obsolete. Notes Use This function is available for all project elements and for resources on the Notes tab page. checklist. If you have granted authorizations to user groups or organizations in an archived project.2008 Archiving Use You are not allowed to delete a project or template that has been released within the cProjects application. You can only flag projects for archiving that have the status Completed or Canceled. but can be read from the archive for display purposes. You can also print all notes saved for a project element. For more information. you only flag a project in cProjects for archiving. The project or template then no longer exists in the database.

3. Choose Set for Processing from the Change Status dropdown box. tasks.. 1. Choose Set ‘Not Relevant’ from the Change Status dropdown box. Save your data. The checklist items. Setting a Checklist and Checklist Item to Not Relevant . approvals of the locked project element no longer appear in the project list or under My Approvals in the initial view. For more information about the effects of changing the status. 2. 3.. Enter an actual start date in the Confirmation area. You can no longer make entries in any of the fields. Go to the Additional Data tab page. The system changes the status [Seite 250] of the project element to Locked. 2. The system changes the status to In Process. you cannot make any more changes to it. . and if required. 1. The system changes the status and sets the result to Not Relevant for the checklist item. You can unlock the project by choosing Unlock. 3. 2. The project element you want to edit has been released.09.. Procedure Locking a Project Definition and Phase You can lock a project definition or a phase even if it has the status Created.2008 You can change the note if you have not already saved the project. Once you have saved. 1. Choose Lock from the Change Status dropdown box. Save your data. . Editing a Task When you start to edit a task. The entire project or the entire phase with all dependent objects is thereby protected from changes. you want to document the progress of your work in the system. Project Planning Editing a Project Element Prerequisites You opened a project element you want to edit and are on the Basic Data tab page. choose the Reset ‘Not Relevant’ entry. If you want to reset the status.SAP Online Help 12. see Status of Checklists [Seite 254] and Status of Checklist Items [Seite 255]. Collaboration Projects 75 .

SAP Online Help 12. Once you have completed the task. enter the actual finish date. Integration In order to delete an object. 5.09. Prerequisites Object Project element [Seite 12] Prerequisites The project element still has the status Created The project element and the superior project element (if one exists) are not locked For checklist items: the checklist item is changeable [Extern] You have administration authorization for the project element Document [Seite 198] The document has the status In Process The document is not locked The document is not checked out by another user The project element to which the document is assigned meets the prerequisites for deletion You have write authorization for the document Template [Seite 36] The template still has the status Created The template is not locked You have administration authorization for the template Collaboration Projects 76 . certain prerequisites must be met. Enter values in the Percentage Complete field and Confirmation field on a regular basis. Now you can confirm the task [Seite 89].2008 4. Deletion of Objects Use You use this function to delete objects without having to set a deletion flag. These prerequisites are influenced by the status [Seite 250] and the lock logic [Seite 70] of the object and the authorizations [Seite 242] you have for the object.

The individual approval has not been granted or rejected yet The approval for the phase is not complete yet You have administration authorization for the approval Activities The following table shows you how and where you can delete various objects: Object to be deleted Project element Where you must be located In the editing view of a project What you must do Select the project element in the structure tree and choose Delete Select the document in the document folder and choose Delete Select the template and choose Delete Select the collaboration and choose Delete Link Select the link and choose Delete Document In the editing view of a project on the Documents tab page In the editing view of a template In the editing view of a project on the Collaborations tab page In the editing view of a project on the Objects tab page Template Collaboration Object link Collaboration Projects 77 .09. However. your system administrator can set up the system so that you can still delete individual approvals after the approval process has begun.SAP Online Help 12. tool. or characteristic of a control plan.2008 Collaboration [Seite 219] The project element to which the collaboration belongs is not locked and not completed/finished You have write authorization for the collaboration Object link [Seite 157] The project element to which the object link belongs is not locked and not completed/finished You have write authorization for the object link Process step. You cannot delete a control plan itself. The control plan still has the status Created The control plan is not locked The project element to which the control plan belongs is not locked and not completed You have administration authorization for the control plan Individual approval or decision maker [Seite 237] You have not yet begun the approval.

In the detail view. The links have a time interval which can also be a negative value. 2. select the task from the project structure by choosing Find. Enter the time interval that should be between the two tasks. For links between tasks at the same level. If there are no tasks at the same level as the task you want to link or if all tasks at the same level are already linked to this task. Procedure . Select the calendar you want to use for the relationship. tools. 7. the field is not ready for input. 4. 5. The relationship influences the scheduling [Seite 79] of the project. Save your entries. you can choose from all possible tasks and tasks that have not yet been linked. 1. The system enters the task in the corresponding table. you have selected the Relationship tab page. choose Delete. in the dropdown box. Prerequisites You are in the detailed view of a project and in the structure tree [Seite 41] you have selected the task for which you want to edit or enter relationships.SAP Online Help 12.09. 8. Select a task and a link type. Choose Predecessor or Successor. A number of different link types are available. 3. To remove a predecessor or successor from the list..2008 Process steps. Collaboration Projects 78 . For links between tasks at any level. Choose Task (Same Level) or Task (Any Level). You can also create relationships with all four link types in the graphical view [Seite 61]. Choose Edit. or characteristics of a control plan version Individual approval or decision maker In the editing view of a control plan version In the editing view of a phase on the Approval tab page Decision Maker Select the element you want to delete in the overview and choose Delete Select the individual approval and choose Delete Editing the Relationship Between Tasks Use You specify how tasks within a project are related to one another by creating links between the tasks: You can create links between tasks at the same level of the project structure or between tasks at different levels of the project structure. 6.

phases. Features General You can enter fixed dates for the project elements.09. Prerequisites You specified a scheduling type in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Define Project Types. Checklist items do not have a duration or a start date and you can only enter a fixed date for the planned finish. specify the time frame of execution (see Editing the Relationship Between Tasks [Seite 78]). fixed dates for the planned start and the planned finish. You can enter phase dates that overlap as well as task dates or checklist item dates that are outside the phase dates. the system offers you a scheduling function. the system sets the current date as the start date. if task dates are outside the time frame of phases during top-down scheduling. In order to change attributes that influence dates and to carry out scheduling. the dates of the dependent project elements (lower-level elements and linked elements) are taken into account and also scheduled. For each project type. The system informs you if the dates overlap by displaying messages in the log. The system calculates the finish date from the remaining project data during scheduling. for example. you can choose whether you want to use bottom-up scheduling or top-down scheduling. for the duration of phases and tasks Dependencies between tasks which.2008 Scheduling Use When you schedule a project you must take many factors into consideration. When the dates are scheduled. You can enter a duration for project definitions. Collaboration Projects 79 . and create a calendar. for example. Confirmed dates for tasks and checklist items (see Confirming Tasks [Seite 89] and Confirming Checklist Items [Seite 89]) To meet these requirements. for example. You can schedule each project element individually. for example. You can also edit dates in the table view [Seite 58] and the graphical view [Seite 61]. The finish date field remains empty. specified by the customer Empirical values. such as: Basic dates for the project and individual phases. and tasks.SAP Online Help 12. The time unit for the duration of project elements is Day. If you do not enter fixed dates for the project. you require administration authorization. The system uses messages to inform you of any conflict situations during scheduling.

the system no longer automatically calculates the dates of the lower-level project elements. the system automatically schedules only the project elements that still have the status Created. if any exist. the dates of this project element and its dependent elements are recalculated automatically when you make date-relevant changes to a dependent project element. The dates of the tasks of a phase are calculated on the basis of the dates of the phase. and have priority over links to other tasks. from the finish date of the phase or project. and tasks. choose the Earliest Dates and Latest Dates pushbuttons located in the detail view of the relevant project element on the Basic Data tab page. and fixed dates. Collaboration Projects 80 . Top-Down Scheduling The dates of the phases are calculated on the basis of the dates of the project definition. This takes into account the order and the duration. To do so. In scheduling. taking into account their links. only thedates of this one project element are recalculated. as well as the fixed dates. Scheduling Types Provided that a project element has the status Created. The dates of the subtasks are calculated in the same way. Tasks are not taken into account. if you change to a new tab page or save your data) or choose Enter on your keyboard. checklist items. Dates in the latest position are determined by backward scheduling starting from the finish date. using the dates from the higher-level tasks. fixed dates have priority over outline dates specified by the higher-level project element. Bottom-Up Scheduling The dates of a project element are calculated from the dates of the lower-level project elements.SAP Online Help 12. Once you release the project. Determining Dates You can define the earliest or latest calculated dates as fixed dates in phases. or if no tasks have been assigned.09. The system recalculates once you perform the next action in the system (for example. fixed dates. If you make changes to a project element below a released project element. duration. and actual dates. The dates of the tasks that belong to a checklist item are calculated based on the dates of the phase or project to which the checklist item belongs. duration. taking into account their order. it only does this if you call scheduling manually [Seite 81].2008 Dependencies The system calculates the start and finish dates of the project elements (for checklist items only finish dates) in earliest and latest position: Dates in the earliest position are determined by forward scheduling starting from the start date of the project definition. After releasing a project element. thereby preventing dates from being changed when scheduling is carried out again. The dates of the checklist items are determined from the latest finish date of the assigned tasks.

01. you enter "Start no earlier than" as the start date constraint for the task and 06. the system carries out scheduling automatically when you carry out the next action in the system or choose Enter. The duration of the task is 30 days. You cannot specify any other constraints or enter any dates. Therefore.2008 Time Constraints Use You can define constraints for when a project element should start and finish. scheduling no longer takes place automatically for this project element because the system presumes that the dates are fixed from this point onwards and can only be changed in exceptional situations.30 in a single year. Collaboration Projects 81 . You have administration authorization for this project element and for its dependent project elements (lower-level elements and linked elements that are scheduled together with the current element). the start date and finish date of the project element are determined by scheduling. The system takes this date constraint into account. and if top-down scheduling takes place.15 due to delivery dates. If bottom-up scheduling takes place. This task cannot start earlier than 06.SAP Online Help 12. to 06. Prerequisites You are in the editing view of a project element you want to schedule. once you have released the project element. Earliest possible Latest possible Example You create a task in a phase that lasts from 01. the postponement of the finish date of the task means that the finish date of the phase is adjusted accordingly. Scheduling Manually Use When you enter dates for a project element. However. The following constraints are considered to be fixed dates in scheduling: Must start on Must finish on The following constraint types are also available: Start no earlier than Finish no earlier than Start no later than Finish no later than When the following constraints are used.15 as the start date. it reports that the finish date of the task conflicts with the finish date of the phase. The dates are not calculated automatically either if you have selected the Scheduling Only Manually indicator in your user settings [Seite 28].09.

and tasks. the start dates of this element apply as fixed dates in scheduling. phases. The system calculates the dates of the selected project element as well as the dependent project elements again. You cannot change the project type. the project it belongs to and the predecessor phase must both have already been released. Features The manual or automatic release of individual project elements has the following consequences: Project definition: The project is released for processing (see Editing Project Structures [Seite 56]). Phase: The phase is released for processing. You only have to release a project element manually if the prerequisites for the release were not met. As a rule. The project is no longer scheduled automatically. checklist type. Save the changes. checklists.09. or task type for projects. all project elements below the project definition are automatically released once the higher-level project element is released. Prerequisites You entered a project type. you have to release the project element for processing. Procedure .. phase type.SAP Online Help 12. The first phase of the project is released. 1. The lower-level project elements are no longer scheduled automatically. This is also true if the higher-level element was released automatically. Collaboration Projects 82 . Choose Schedule.2008 If you do not have the necessary authorization for the dependent project elements. If you want to release a phase. 2. See also: Scheduling [Seite 79] Releasing Project Elements Use Once you have entered the basic data for a project element and want to start processing it.

Task: The task is released for processing (see Confirming Tasks [Seite 89]). Checklist item: The checklist item is released for processing. Note Collaboration Projects 83 . choose the entry Release from the Change Status dropdown box in the editing view of this project element in the General area on the Basic Data tab page. The lower-level checklist items are released for processing.2008 You cannot change the phase type. Activities To release a project element manually. Any existing checklist references are resolved. You cannot change the checklist type. The subtasks are released for processing.09. The subtasks are released for processing. Save the project. The subtasks and lower-level checklists are released for processing. After the export. Checklist: The checklist is released for processing. you can use all the functions available in Microsoft Project.SAP Online Help 12. You cannot move the phase or insert another phase ahead of it. You cannot change the task type. Import and Export of Data Export to Microsoft Project (Client) [Seite 83] Export to Microsoft Project (Server) [Seite 85] Export to an XML File [Seite 86] Importing of Project Data [Seite 87] Export to Microsoft Project (Client) You can export a project or version in cProjects to Microsoft Project (Client).

Transferring Dates If you have set the start constraint in cProjects. End of the note. the scheduling results in Microsoft Project could differ from those in cProjects. the duration values in Microsoft Project and cProjects may differ. the Microsoft Project system sets forward scheduling. For the project elements. For more information about the export to Microsoft Project (Client). Prerequisites You installed Microsoft Project (Client) 2002 or a higher release on your PC. You have write authorization for the project. when you transfer project elements. The task type and checklist type are also displayed for tasks and checklists.2008 Due to different scheduling types and calendars. see SAP Note 958210. This can cause problems because Microsoft Project has its own scheduling logic. You performed the corresponding activities in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Connection to External Systems Microsoft Project Integration .SAP Online Help 12. the Microsoft Project system sets backward scheduling. Features Exporting Objects The following table shows which objects are transferred to Microsoft Project (Client) and which objects they are mapped to there: Object in cProjects Project definition Phase Task Task and summary task Checklist Checklist item Role Resource Object in Microsoft Project Project summary task Furthermore. However. Note In the standard system Microsoft Project does not process any calendar information from cProjects. If you have set the finish constraint in cProjects. you transfer the attributes as well: Information about the phase type is automatically displayed in a Microsoft Project text field for the phase. you can transfer additional attributes that were specified by your system administrator in Customizing. thereby taking its own calendar into account. Since Microsoft Project carries out its own scheduling. When you export to Microsoft Project. you can use the calendar information from cProjects via a Business Add-In (BAdI) Collaboration Projects 84 . dates are transferred for each task.09.

Transferring Project Roles Project roles are transferred to Microsoft Project (Client) as resources and assigned to the corresponding tasks as in cProjects. the system automatically copies the names of the corresponding fields from cProjects. the Duration and Work fields in Microsoft Project are dependent on each other. They are always derived from the dates of lower-level tasks (subtasks). Therefore. End of the note. depending on what settings you made in Customizing. Collaboration Projects 85 . dates for project elements that are depicted as summary tasks in Microsoft Project can differ in cProjects and Microsoft Project. the cProjects system can fill both fields during the export.2008 Connection to External Systems You cannot directly influence the start and finish dates for summary tasks in Microsoft Project. Activities You can start the export of an operational project from the editing view of a project at project definition level or from the Projects initial view. More Information Export to Microsoft Project (Server) Importing of Project Data Export to Microsoft Project (Server) Use You can export a project or version in cProjects to Microsoft® Project. the Duration and Work fields in Microsoft Project are independent of each other. If there are fixed values or value tables for the fields in cProjects. Microsoft Project does not set any attributes when it assigns the tasks. You can assign attributes to the resources in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Therefore. There is no direct equivalent for these values in cProjects. Depending on the settings in Microsoft Project. you can use all the functions available in Microsoft Project. After the export.SAP Online Help (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Microsoft Project Integration ). the duration and work data in Microsoft Project may differ from that in cProjects. other values can be produced for work and required capacity. You can start the export of a project version from the editing view of an open version or via the Versions initial view. End of the note. If your project is in the execution phase. Choose Export and enter your data. 12. Note Microsoft Project uses its own logic to calculate values for work and resources from the task assignments. If your project is in the planning phase. Input Table You can assign standard fields and user-defined fields (enterprise fields) to cProjects fields in the configuration. The system either exports the work or the percentage complete.09. For this reason. and the other value is calculated automatically by Microsoft Project. If you assign enterprise fields. a list of values is generated in Microsoft Project in the appropriate field.

SAP supplies a predefined XML schema for this purpose (see transaction SE80 for the BSP application CPROJECTS_TRA under Mimes XML cProjects_xsd). Activities You can start the export of an operational project from the editing view of a project at project definition level or from the Projects initial view. see SAP Note 983597. Constraints The system only exports the project or version data that is defined in the XML schema. You have write authorization for the project. You can start the export of a project version from the editing view of an open version or from the Versions initial view. You performed the relevant activities in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Connection to External Systems Microsoft Project Integration Microsoft Project Server Integration. The system automatically transfers the description and the start and finish date from the project definition. for example.2008 Due to different scheduling types and calendars. and checklists. Features Exporting Objects You can only export the project definition from cProjects to a new Microsoft Project project in Microsoft Project Server (by selecting a Microsoft Project Server project template). Prerequisites You have set up a connection between your cProjects system and Microsoft Project Server 2003. phases. tasks. the scheduling results in Microsoft Project could differ from those in cProjects. Choose Export and enter your data.09. You cannot export other project elements. Your system administrator can also specify other attributes in Customizing. See also: Export to Microsoft Project (Client) [Seite 83] Importing of Project Data [Seite 87] Export to an XML File Use You can export a project or version to an XML file to exchange data with another application.SAP Online Help 12. Collaboration Projects 86 . Therefore. Prerequisites You have write authorization for the project. for example. For more information about the export to Microsoft Project (Server). it does not export shopping carts or any external staffings that belong to them.

2.. Choose Export in the Projects initial view or in an open project. 4. SAP supplies a predefined XML schema for importing XML data (see transaction SE80 for the BSP application CPROJECTS_TRA under Mimes XML cProjects_xsd ). Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be met before you can import a project from Microsoft Project: You have installed Microsoft Project Client 2002 (or a higher release) on your PC or you already have a connection to Microsoft Project Server 2003.09. Enter the number of the version you want to export and the number of the project for this version. If you start the export from an open version. Choose Export in the Versions initial view or in an open version. 5.SAP Online Help 12. 1. Choose Export. 3. 1. Open the XML file or save it to the hard drive. See also: Importing of Project Data [Seite 87] Importing of Project Data You can import a project or version into Microsoft Project or import project data from an XML file into cProjects. Enter the number of the project you want to export. Features Before the import. the system checks whether a project already exists in cProjects that has the same external ID as the ID in the import file: Collaboration Projects 87 . For Versions . 5. Select XML File. Choose Export. 3. You performed the corresponding activities in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Connection to External Systems Microsoft Project Integration . you do not need to enter the number of the version or the number of the project for this version. 4. Open the XML file or save it to the hard drive. 2..2008 Procedure For Projects . Select XML File.

The duration of the project elements in cProjects is calculated from this. If the system generated a version. You can now edit the project and save it.2008 If the project does not exist yet. Activities Choose the Import button in the Projects initial view. If you have set forward scheduling in Microsoft Project. the system creates a simulation from the imported data with the simulation version 0IMPORT and the project number and displays the new simulation. End of the caution. the cProjects system sets the start constraint. The cProjects system carries out scheduling by default straight after the import. and tasks in cProjects on the basis of a Microsoft Project upload. or task type to a corresponding enterprise field (user-defined field) in Microsoft Project. and enter your data. If you have set backward scheduling in Microsoft Project. you have to assign the phase. checklists. Special Features of the Import from Microsoft Project You can include phases. you can reconcile it with the operational project.SAP Online Help 12. See also: Export to Microsoft Project (Client) Export to Microsoft Project (Server) Export to an XML File Confirmation Confirming Checklist Items [Seite 89] Confirming Tasks [Seite 89] Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet [Seite 90] Collaboration Projects 88 . The duration of the project elements is not imported but the dependencies between the project elements and their constraints are. checklist. To do this. Caution You can only import data to a simulation if you have read authorization for the project that already exists in cProjects.09. the system creates a new project and opens it. You do this in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. the cProjects system sets the finish constraint. If the project already exists. select the format.

Enter your confirmation data. For more information. The checklist item has the status Released or In Process. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the task you want to confirm and click it. You now want to confirm the checklist item as finished in the system. Choose Finish from the Change Status dropdown box. Select the entry OK or Not OK from the Result dropdown box. if required. 2. Procedure . 3. 4.. The task has the status Released or In Process. The project type of the current project allows confirmation for tasks. Time recording using the cross-application time sheet [Seite 90] (CATS) is not active. 5. 2.SAP Online Help 12. It no longer appears under My Checklist Items in the Checklist Items initial view. Procedure . In the structure tree [Seite 41].. Collaboration Projects 89 . Prerequisites All tasks that belong to the checklist item have the status Completed.09. You now want to confirm the task in the system. You can also confirm times for project roles and for the project definition. navigate to the checklist item you want to confirm and click on it. Enter an actual finish date in the Confirmation area. 1. Result The finished checklist item is given the status Finished and is confirmed in the system.2008 Confirming Checklist Items Use You are defined as the person responsible for a checklist item and have finished the checklist item. You are on the Additional Data tab page in the Checklist Items or Projects initial view. Prerequisites You are on the Additional Data tab page in the Tasks or Projects initial view. see Confirming Tasks [Seite 89]. Confirming Tasks Use You are defined as the person responsible for a task and have started to edit the task or have already completed it. 1. Go to the Basic Data or Status tab page.

When you complete the task. End of the caution. you can view the following.2008 The system calculates the remaining work from the difference between the planned work (see the Work field in the Advanced screen area) and the time you entered in the Confirmation field. 3. manual confirmation is no longer possible. Integration The system creates a worklist in CATS to enable you to record your time for a role or task. Collaboration Projects 90 . If you are using SAP ECC 6. If the actual start date has not been entered either. the system automatically enters the current date as the actual finish date. project roles. It no longer appears under My Tasks in the Tasks initial view. set the RemainWork Man.09. change to the Basic Data tab page and choose the entry Complete from the Change Status dropdown box.SAP Online Help 12. or project definitions) to which you are assigned in the confirmation time frame: If you set up confirmation via project roles. Result The task is given the status Completed and is confirmed in the system. Once you have completed the task. the worklist displays all roles for confirmation to which your user is assigned for the confirmation time frame. additional detail data for tasks and make changes to it: Actual start Actual finish Percentage complete Notes Remaining work Work Caution Once you have activated CATS confirmation. Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet You use this function to record the work you carried out for a cProjects project in the CrossApplication Time Sheet (CATS). the system checks the actual start and finish dates on the Additional Data tab page.0 EhP03. If the actual finish date has not been entered.: indicator. If you want to enter the remaining work manually. the system also enters the current date in this field. The system selects all objects (tasks.

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

If you set up confirmation via tasks, the worklist displays all tasks for confirmation to which your user is assigned by means of a role for the confirmation time frame and which have been released. For the confirmation time frame, the system first checks the time frame you specified on the Staffing tab page. Then it checks the time frame you specified in the Tasks Assigned to Selected Project Role group box on the Tasks tab page. If you only made entries on one of the tab pages, these apply. Note You cannot confirm for summary tasks. End of the note. Note If you have not assigned any roles to the tasks, the system cannot determine the tasks for which you are responsible. In this case, the system response is as follows: End of the note. 1. If you have allowed confirmation for the project, the system displays the project definition for time recording. 2. If you have not allowed confirmation for the project, the system cannot create a worklist and you cannot record your time. Note that the planned times in cProjects are only transferred to CATS if you are using SAP ECC 6.0 EhP03. The worklist also contains information about the project’s account assignment object.

Prerequisites
Your system administrator activated the time recording function in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Define Project Types. Your system administrator set up accounting integration; see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Accounting Integration. Your system administrator set up communication via Application Link Enabling (ALE); see Customizing for SAP Web Application Server under Application Link Enabling (ALE). For more information about setting up ALE for cProjects integration with CATS, see SAP Note 954860. Note This setting is not required if ERP and cProjects are installed on the same system. End of the note. The cProjects system is available at the time of confirmation If you want to display detail data during confirmation, your system administrator activated the business function BF CA_CATS_CPR_CORE.

Features
When the times you recorded in CATS have been released and approved, the system automatically transfers them to cProjects and SAP Controlling. The system also transfers saved detail data.

Collaboration Projects

91

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

In SAP Controlling, the system generates actual costs from the records that were transferred based on plan prices from cost center accounting and posts them to the account assignment object. When determining costs and updating the actual costs, the system does not support the assignment of personnel costs to the recipient object (not updating CO directly from CATS but via HR) because in this scenario the origin of the costs is unclear. In cProjects, the transferred records for times are saved in table DPR_CONF_LI. The transferred detail data is saved in table DPR_CONF_DET. You use the DPR_CATS_CPR_TRANSF program to transfer the total time recorded and the saved detail data to the cProjects UI. We recommend that you schedule the program in a batch run. The actual start date is also transferred for tasks and project roles. The system always displays the earliest date. If, for example, you record time for a task for the first time on 07.01. the system makes 07.01. the actual start date. If you record times later on for 06.30. the system changes the actual start date to 06.30. Transferring the recorded times to cProjects does not change the status of the confirmation object. Even if the percentage complete is 100%, the confirmation object is not automatically closed. However, saved detail data and times that have already been recorded for an object that is closed are still totaled up and displayed. Example On 12.10. you record time for a task. The data is transferred to cProjects the same day but the DPR_CATS_CPR_TRANS program is scheduled for 12.15. On 12.12. the project lead changes the status of the task to Closed. However, the times recorded are still totaled up and displayed on 12.15. End of the example.

Activities
Create a worklist in CATS from a particular date and with the cProjects profile. This profile also specifies the length of the confirmation time period. Note You can only confirm for the objects that appear in the worklist. You cannot add any more objects automatically. You can only enter detail data for tasks if you have the relevant authorization. End of the note. Copy the line in which you want to confirm from the upper area to the lower confirmation area. Enter the required detail data and save your entries. Record your time and save your entries. For more information about working with the Cross-Application Time Sheet, see SAP Library under Logistics Customer Service (CS) Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) .

Collaboration Projects

92

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Project Resource Planning
Purpose
Having the right employees at the right place at the right time is one of the central requirements of today’s human resource management. Project Resource Planning provides a planning tool for you to optimize your human resource deployment. It focuses on using your employees efficiently and assigning them to projects or orders based on demand, qualifications, and availability. The project lead first uses project roles to depict which type of resource is required in a project, that is, which function the employee (resource) carries out in the project. The project role includes information about the qualifications the resource should have and when and for how long the resource should be available. The project lead can assign tasks to the roles or resources straight away. In the resource search, the system determines suitable resources for each role and task on the basis of their qualifications. The project lead’s or customer’s preferred resources can be stored as candidates in the system. In the staffing process, staffing or candidate managers can also determine resources based on their availability. The project lead or resource manager can first reserve their preferred resource or assign the resource straight away. At the same time, the project lead can send e-mails to resources with details of the project, directly from the application. You have the following options for carrying out project resource planning: You can do all your planning in cProjects. You can select the resources by their availability. To do this, you can either use the resource planning application (RPA) from Service Resource Planning in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) or you can predefine the capacity of the resources by means of Customizing in cProjects; the latter is the simpler option. You can schedule the resources with SAP xRPM [Extern].

Prerequisites
You created a project [Seite 31]. You created resources [Seite 126] as business partners in Resource Management. You created the role of the person responsible for the project. If you want to use groupware integration [Extern], you require SAP CRM and middleware, as well as Workforce Deployment.

You can transfer organization types, qualifications, and approximate availability from SAP Human Capital Management.

Process Flow
..

1. You create a project role. For more information, see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]. 2. You assign tasks [Seite 102] to the project role. 3. You define the qualifications [Seite 108] that the resource needs to meet the requirements profile of the role.

Collaboration Projects

93

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

4. When using project resource planning for direct staffing, you staff the role with resources [Seite 126]. You can either assign resources straight away or first search [Seite 116] for suitable and available resources. When using project resource planning as a staffing process [Seite 110], project managers and staffing managers work together to locate and assign resources to projects. To do this, you have to select the Resource Manager via Responsible Organization staffing type in Customizing for Collaboration Projects, by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. 5. To reserve suitable resources provisionally, you can first save them as candidates [Seite 130] until you have clarified whether the employee or the employee's manager agrees to his or her participation in the project. You can also reserve [Seite 136] a resource for a particular project role. 6. You can staff a project role and define corresponding attributes without having to specify the resource straight away. 7. You can staff [Extern] the project role with the chosen resource. 8. You notify [Seite 133] the relevant resource or his or her manager by e-mail or by a groupware task [Seite 139] if there is groupware integration. 9. You schedule appointments for your resources.

You can set up staffings in cProjects but you cannot schedule appointments. If you want to schedule appointments, you can use the RPA. The time units from the RPA must be defined as permitted time units in cProjects so that they can be transferred from the RPA to cProjects. For more information, see SAP Note 866776.

Result
The project is staffed with suitable resources. You have assigned tasks, the required capacity for these tasks, and the period in which they are to be carried out, to each resource.

Project Roles Definition
A project role represents a position in a project that is to be filled by a business partner, for example, the role of consultant in a consulting project. The project role describes which type of resource is required in a project, that is, which function the resource carries out in the project. The project role includes information about the qualifications that the resource should have and when and for how long the resource should be available.

A similar resource description exists in Organizational Management. Here, the positions describe the resources required for the organizational plan.

Collaboration Projects

94

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Use
You create project roles according to the planned requirement for a project, thereby creating the foundation of Resource Planning. You can only assign tasks, staff roles with resources, and therefore complete resource planning, once you have created the project roles.

For more information about creating project roles, see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]. Project roles can have the following statuses: A red icon if the project role is not staffed A yellow icon if the project role is partially staffed A green icon if the project role is fully staffed

You can define the following attributes for each project role: The qualifications a resource requires to be able to fulfill the project role The tasks that a resource is to work on The work and time frame for the individual tasks Once you have assigned tasks to the project role and staffed the project role with resources, you can check whether all assignments and staffings are consistent. To do so, choose Check.

You use the DPR_TRUNCATE Business Add-In (BAdI) to control whether or how the system is to delete or truncate the project roles and staffings when an operational project is completed or if it is canceled. For more information, see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles BAdI: Control Truncation and Deletion of Roles and Staffings.

Structure
The project role overview with the current status and assigned resources is always displayed in the screen area on the left in the project role definition.

You can sort the project roles at any time to get a better overview. See Sorting Project Roles [Seite 99]. You can also hide the role list to gain more space for editing a project role. In the screen area on the right, you define the business attributes of each project role and assign persons to it. The following tab pages are available: General [Seite 96] (detail view for the project role) Tasks [Seite 102] Staffing Process [Seite 110] Qualifications [Seite 108]

Collaboration Projects

95

You can make these settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types.2008 Costing [Seite 167] Staffing [Seite 126] Documents [Seite 198] Notes [Seite 74] Shopping Cart [Seite 190] Object Links [Seite 157] Recording Changes [Seite 73] General Definition of a Project Role Use This function provides an overview of the general data for a project role. The General tab page displays the detail data for the selected project role and the scheduled start and finish dates of the project derived from the project data. You can create new project roles or copy existing project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]).SAP Online Help 12. developer or decision maker) A name for the project role The validity period of the project role The confirmed times. you can specify or view the following attributes: Project role type The system displays default project role types according to the project type. When defining new project roles. When you do this. options in the Staffed By column in this IMG activity.. You make a role available for the staffing process by choosing one of the Resource Manager.09.. A name for the project role A function for the project role (for example. you use this function to specify the general data. Prerequisites You are in the Projects initial view [Seite 17] on the Resources General tab page. including the time unit Collaboration Projects 96 . Features The left area of the screen displays an overview of all project roles that you have already created with the status and the resources already assigned.

Choose Create Role. select the required project role type. You are on the Resources tab page in the Projects initial view. In the General group box. The planned required capacity using the time unit of your choice The urgency of the project role. Procedure Creating a new project role 1. The calculated start and finish If you do not specify an explicit validity period for the role. The data then always comes from the distribution data. 2. Creating a Project Role You can create new project roles or copy existing ones.2008 This field is only available if you selected time recording for project roles in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Structure Define Project Types. the system displays the following data for the task assignment [Seite 102] under Task Assignments for Project Role: The number of tasks assigned Earliest start and latest finish date of the tasks The total work assigned Choose Transfer This Data for Project Role to transfer this data to the project role definition. Otherwise you record your times for tasks [Seite 89]. If you chose a project role with distribution. Collaboration Projects 97 . you can no longer manually edit the required capacity in the project role (that is.SAP Online Help 12.09. Prerequisites You have created a project. which indicates how important the project role is The Vacant indicator to document that the role has not been staffed (this is relevant to the vacant role search [Seite 125]) The area and location in which the role is required If tasks are assigned to a project role and the project role type does not permit distribution [Extern]. which you can edit manually (see Distribution of Required Capacity Over Periods [Seite 100]). in the Required Capacity field). See Creating a Project Definition. the system determines and displays the calculated start and calculated finish from the validity period of the project.

qualification requirements. as required. and resources to the project role. qualification requirements. you can copy existing project roles. and task assignments) and candidates. Select the required role by clicking the link. 3. qualifications. and task assignments) of the project role too. End of the note. 5. the project role is copied along with its attributes (required capacity. When using the staffing process. Enter a name for the project role. candidates. the system checks whether the user has the required authorization (staffing manager or candidate manager). Specify the required capacity and the time unit. Enter the required search criteria.SAP Online Help 12.2008 Note The system displays default project role types according to the project type. Enter a description of the project role. The system transfers the staffing. the project role is copied along with its attributes (required capacity. Note You can only select roles from project templates that have been released. You can now assign tasks. 2. 1.09. Copying an existing project role If you have the administrator role. Collaboration Projects 98 . by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types . and task assignments) only. Including a project role 1. You can make the required settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. 3. End of the note. Choose Include Role. Select the project role you want to copy. 4. qualification requirements. 6. and attributes (required capacity. 4. When performing direct staffing. If you are using the extended staffing process. Choose Copy Role. as required. See also: Project Roles General Definition of a Project Role Result The new project role is displayed in the group box on the left. 2. The system displays a results list. Specify the time frame.

SAP Online Help 12. which resource staffed the role Required capacity of the role How much of the capacity is already covered by a resource Collaboration Projects 99 . 1. Prerequisites You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page. The other project roles are moved down to accommodate the new position. You see the project role list in the new order. Views Use The Project Roles and Project Role Staffing views give you a quick overview of the current project. 2. Features Project Roles view This view provides an overview of all existing project roles in the current project. 3.09. You can also display the following information about the roles: Type of project role and name Status of the project role Whether the role has already been staffed and if so.. Result The selected project role is moved to the new position in the project role list. You can change the sequence of project roles in this list to suit your needs. Choose the project role in the list that you want to move. Choose the new position for the selected project role. Save your data. Procedure . 4. Display the Sort Role drop-down list.2008 Sorting Project Roles Use Project roles appear as a list in the Resources tab page in the Projects initial view. Prerequisites You are in the Resources tab page in the Projects initial view.

the system receives information about the availability of resources from here.SAP Online Help 12. Integration If Workforce Deployment (WFD) is active. the availability is determined as follows: Collaboration Projects 100 . If WFD is not active.09. You can also display the following information about the roles: Whether the resources have been reserved for the role or whether they are already assigned to the role The work assigned to the role (through tasks) The period for which the role is staffed with the resource Required capacity (resulting from the staffing of the role with a resource) Validity period of the role Notes about the staffing Status Type of resource Name of resource Name and number of role Text for role type Vacant indicator Activities Select the view you require from the View list box. Distribution of Required Capacity over Periods You use this function to distribute the required capacity of a project role or project role staffing over a number of periods.2008 Validity period of the role Calculated start date and finish date Function Area and location Urgency Vacant indicator Project Role Staffing view This view provides an overview of whether all project roles are fully staffed with resources and the resources with which the project roles have been staffed.

Two charts are available on the Staffing tab page: Required Capacity: Here you compare the availability of a staffed resource with your existing staffings for this and other project roles. If you do not enter any data here. the green bar shows the total of all fixed role staffings. and the green bar shows the required capacity of the project role. If there are no fixed dates.2008 From the resource availability or location (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Business Partner Employee Overview ). You can check the intervals. From the calendar or hours per day (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Make General Settings for Distribution ). the gray bar shows the other booked capacity. The blue curve shows the Collaboration Projects 101 . A chart is available on the General tab page: The red curve shows the required capacity of the project role. Note For staffing. The red curve shows the available capacity of the resource. the system only displays the Req. you do not enter the total required capacity yourself. In this case. you can plan the periods as you choose. There must not be any gaps between the periods and they must not overlap. You do this on the Structure tab page in the Additional Data view. the yellow bar shows the total of all reserved required capacities from the role staffings. In addition to the table display. it is calculated by the system from the total of the individual required capacities you entered. fixed dates must also exist for the role or resource.09. you can plan the required capacity for each individual period. Capacity Distribution over Periods area in the General view if you selected a resource. the information you entered in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Make General Settings for Distribution applies. The required capacities must be within the validity period of the project role. Free Capacity: Here you compare the remaining required capacity of the project role with the capacity the staffed resource still has available. End of the note. If you select a generic interval as the period type. the yellow bar shows the other reserved capacity. Once distributed values exist.SAP Online Help 12. you can display the distribution of required capacity over periods as a chart. The system displays the distribution of required capacity over periods. You are on the Resources tab page in the General or Staffing view. Features General If you use distribution for a project role. You can enter a period type and a distribution unit for the distribution at project definition level. the system sets them automatically. Prerequisites You are editing a project role whose project role type supports distribution (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types ).

The system then recalculates the required capacity from the role to task assignments. Prerequisites You created tasks on the Structure tab page of the Projects initial view.2008 free capacity and the red bar shows the remaining required capacity of the project role. you can use the assignment of project roles to tasks [Seite 106] view.09. You have administration authorization for the tasks you want to assign. End of the note. on the other hand. Note You can determine the required capacity of a distributed role automatically from the assigned tasks. You can enter the following data: Time frame of the assignment The system displays the possible time frame to help you. To do this. Collaboration Projects 102 . see Advanced Distribution. choose Update in Accordance with Tasks. If you make changes to entries in the table and then choose Enter. The Tasks initial view provides an overview of all tasks to which you are assigned by means of a project role (see Project List [Seite 25]). Here. For more information. You can use this function for the following types of changes: Adding required capacity to the existing required capacities of a period Subtracting required capacity from the existing required capacities of a period Setting the required capacity as a new required capacity for a period For more information. Distribution Functions You use distribution functions if you want to make the same changes to the required capacity in several different periods.SAP Online Help 12. you want to assign multiple project roles to a task. The upper area of the group box on the right shows the tasks you have already assigned to the current project role. Features The group box on the left shows the project roles with their status and assigned resources. the system updates the chart. If. see Task [Seite 15] and Creating Basic Data for a Task [Seite 54]. you select the project role you want to edit on this tab page. Integration You use this function if you want to assign multiple tasks to a project role. Task Assignment Use You use this function to assign tasks [Seite 104] to project roles.

Yellow icon The task is not fully staffed: Required capacity of task > required capacity of assigned project role(s). The task is overstaffed: Required capacity of task < required capacity of role. The task is fully staffed: Required capacity of task = required capacity of project role(s). the system issues the error message Selection for assignments between roles and tasks is invalid. the system displays the resources in the Resources group box that belong to the staffings of the project role currently selected. you can also select one or more resources that staff the role and assign them to the task straight away. Collaboration Projects 103 . the system displays the project structure with all the tasks and the roles that are already assigned to the tasks. Time unit for the work You can assign more tasks in the lower area of this group box. Activities You have the following options: You can assign any number of tasks to each project role in a single work step. selecting the new resource in the Resources group box. Instead of assigning a project role to a task and leaving it open as to which resources are participating in the completion of the task. The task has been assigned work = 0.09.SAP Online Help 12. On the left. You can distribute the work of one task over multiple project roles. You can also replace a resource that exists in an assignment by selecting the assignment in the relevant group box. If you do this. It is not possible to assign multiple tasks to multiple roles. and then choosing Assign Resource. The following information is displayed for each task: The time frame in which you want the task to be carried out The required capacity you have already assigned (assigned required capacity or planned required capacity) Status Icon Red icon Description No project roles are assigned to the task. Green icon Green-yellow icon In the screen area on the lower right.2008 Work that the current project role is expected to carry out for a task The planned work for a task does not restrict staffing: You can exceed it as required.

Remaining required capacity of the role: Total required capacity of the role minus the required capacity of all tasks assigned to the role. Remaining required capacity of the task: Planned work minus the total required capacity of all role to task assignments that affect this task. You specify the staffing type in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types.2008 A task can only be selected for a role if the validity period of the task overlaps with that of the project role. Resources Tasks The system uses the following values to calculate the required capacity: a. If you use staffing by the project lead you can delete assignments at any time.SAP Online Help 12. the following prerequisites must be met: You have administration authorization for these tasks. you use staffing by the resource manager. You are in the Projects initial view on one of the following tab pages: Structure Roles You see the Roles tab page only if you have your cursor on a task in the group box on the left in the project definition. The project lead can change the role to task assignment irrespective of what the status is. on the other hand. you can only delete task assignments if they have the status Staffing in Preparation (see Deleting a Task Assignment [Seite 105]).09. Assigning Tasks and Project Roles Prerequisites You created tasks on the Structure tab page of the Projects initial view. You can restrict the time period of a task assignment. The validity period of a task does not overlap with the validity period of the project role. Remaining availability of the business partner in the role: Total required capacity of the role staffing of the business partner minus the total required capacity of all role to task assignments for the same business partner and the same role. by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. c. b. If. you must have chosen the extended staffing process and have selected the Flexible Assignment indicator in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. To do this. Collaboration Projects 104 . To assign project roles to these tasks.

SAP Online Help 12. the system uses the minimum from value a and value b as the default value.2008 If you assign a task to a project role. Roles: 1. You can assign the total required capacity to one role or distribute it over various roles. The Tasks with Assigned Project Roles area displays how much work is planned for the current task and how much of this work has already been assigned. You can see this for each role. See also: Deleting a Task Assignment [Seite 105] Deleting a Task Assignment Use You use this function to delete the assignment of a task to a project role.. Choose the task that you want to assign to the selected project role. Choose the project role or resource to which you want to assign the selected task. You can assign the total required capacity to one role or distribute it over various roles. If the required capacity of the project role or resource staffing is 0. Enter the amount of work that you want to assign to the role. Collaboration Projects 105 . the system always uses value b as the default value. The Project Roles with Assigned Tasks area displays how much work is planned for the current task and how much of this work has already been assigned. 3. to assign the resource to the task directly.. Choose Assign Project Role to assign the task to the project role or select a resource and choose Assign Resource. Enter the period in which you want the task to be carried out.09. 2. Procedure You are on the Structure tab page . Enter the amount of work that you want to assign to the role. 4. 6. the system uses the minimum from value c and value b as the default value. Save your data. Save your data. 5. 4. You are on the Resources tab page . 3. 2. Enter the period for which you want the role to be assigned. If you assign a task to a resource. Tasks: 1. You can see this for each task. Select the role to which you want to assign tasks in the screen area on the left.

Example You want a lead consultant. Save your data. You have the following options: You can assign any number of project roles to each task. it does not delete the entire task from the system. In the upper right area select the tasks or roles whose assignment you want to delete. Procedure ..09. 2. select the project role or task for which you want to delete the assignment.2008 This function deletes the assignment of the task to the project role. to carry out the task Create Project Plan. 1. You can distribute the work of one task over multiple project roles. See also: Assigning Tasks and Project Roles [Seite 104] Assignment of Project Roles to Tasks You use this function to assign project roles to individual tasks. you are in the status Staffing in Preparation.. . Select a task here and then choose one of the following paths: Structure tab page Resources tab page Roles Tasks If you are using the staffing process. Deleting the task from the project role does not affect the availability of the corresponding resource. 4. You then reassign the task to the lead consultant. and not the project lead as originally planned. 3. You are in the Projects initial view. This means that you first have to delete the task assignment to the project lead.SAP Online Help 12. Prerequisites You have administration authorization for the task whose assignment you want to delete. In the area on the left. Note Collaboration Projects 106 . Choose Delete Assignment.

see Task and Creating Basic Data for a Task. The Tasks initial view provides an overview of all tasks to which you are assigned by means of a role (see Project List). on the other hand. the system issues a message. you want to assign multiple tasks to a single project role. The time unit for the work The Project Roles for Current Project group box lists all roles.SAP Online Help 12. You can restrict the time frame of a project role assignment. You can overbook if necessary. For more information. You specify the following: The time frame for which you want the project role to be assigned The work that you want to assign to the role Note The work planned for a task does not restrict staffing. If. End of the note. Features The project structure displays the tasks with their current status. Integration You use this function if you want to assign multiple project roles to a single task.2008 Note that the validity periods of the tasks and project roles must overlap. You have administration authorization for the tasks you want to assign. The role is partially staffed: Required capacity of role > required capacity of assigned task Collaboration Projects 107 . you can use the task assignment view. You can make new assignments. If they do not. You see the project roles that are already assigned to the selected task in the upper screen area. You are in the editing view of a task on the Roles tab page.09. There are no tasks assigned to the role. You can delete assignments (see Deleting a Task Assignment). End of the note. Prerequisites You created tasks on the Structure tab page of the Projects initial view. The following information is displayed for each role: The status: Icon Description o Red icon o Yellow icon The role has been assigned a task with work = 0.

you can flag it as a mandatory qualification. You can define the following attributes for each qualification: If the selected qualification is an essential prerequisite. o o o Validity period of the assignment Amount of planned work you have already assigned Instead of assigning a project role to a task and leaving it open as to which resources are involved in the completion of the task. Features The qualifications catalog represents all qualifications that you can assign to roles or tasks. See Defining Qualifications [Seite 109]. Definition of Qualifications Use You can set down the qualifications required for a project role or a particular task. You can create new qualifications. Qualifications you have already defined are displayed in the resource search [Seite 116] and are used as selection criteria for finding suitable resources.SAP Online Help 12.2008 Green icon Green-yellow icon o o The role is fully staffed: Required capacity of role = required capacity of task The role is overstaffed: Required capacity of role < required capacity of task Assigned roles Information about how much of the planned work you have assigned to the role and the period in which you want the task to be carried out. To do this. See Defining Qualifications [Seite 109]. perform the activities in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Qualification Management Edit Qualifications Catalog. you can also select a resource that staffs the role and assign it to the task straight away. See Selection According to Qualifications [Seite 119]. you must have defined scales in Customizing. you must have defined the qualifications catalog in Customizing. To be able to define proficiencies for the qualifications. Prerequisites To be able to select qualifications.09. You define qualifications for project roles in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page under Qualifications. To do this. perform the activities in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Qualification Management Edit Scales. Collaboration Projects 108 . The Qualification Requirements group box displays the qualifications that are already assigned to the role or task. Integration You define qualifications for tasks in the Projects initial view on the Structure tab page in the task definition Qualifications or in the Tasks initial view on the Qualifications tab page.

.. Defining Qualifications for a Task . 2. The task definition function appears. . From the Structure tab page of the Projects initial screen.09.. In the Projects initial view. You can delete qualifications at any time. Expand the qualifications catalog to select qualifications.SAP Online Help 12. Choose >> (Add Selected Qualification to the Qualification Requirements). The system does not transfer any qualification groups. 1. You can define the necessary proficiency for each qualification. only individual qualifications. The qualification is then transferred to the screen area on the right. Defining Qualifications Prerequisites You defined the qualifications catalog in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Qualification Management Edit Qualifications Catalog.. In the resource search. 3. Enter the required proficiency of the qualification. select the Mandatory checkbox. Collaboration Projects 109 . the system calculates a resource’s suitability percentage from the difference between the required proficiency of a qualification and the degree to which the resource fulfills this. . Choose the appropriate qualification(s). If the selected qualification is an essential prerequisite for carrying out the project role. Choose the Qualifications tab page. Expand the qualifications catalog to select qualifications. The system displays a search result list from which you can select the qualifications you require. 5. You can also use the search function to do this: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search. 2. go to the Resources tab page and then select the role for which you want to specify qualifications from the list of project roles. 3. Choose the Qualifications tab page. See Deleting Qualifications [Seite 110]. 6. Procedure Defining Qualifications for a Project Role . The system displays a search result list from which you can select the qualifications you require. 4. 1. Choose the appropriate qualification(s). select a task.2008 The resource search then only selects resources that have this qualification. You can also use the search function to do this: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search.

You activate this initial view in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Basic Settings Define Initial Views for cProjects.09. by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Collaboration Projects 110 . 1. then go to the Resources tab page and the Qualifications tab. you have to be in the Projects initial view. Staffing Process Use You use this function to staff project roles according to their status using a resource management application outside the project.SAP Online Help 12. 3. Procedure . 5. Prerequisites You use the staffing process for all project roles for which you set the Staffed by Resource Manager via Responsible Organization option for the project role type in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Prerequisites To delete qualifications for a task.. Choose Delete Selected Objects. 6. select the Mandatory checkbox. they access the project roles from the Resources initial view.2008 4. you have to be in the task definition (Projects initial view Structure tab page Task Definition Qualifications). 2. only individual qualifications. Choose >> (Add Selected Qualification to the Qualification Requirements). The system does not transfer any qualification groups. To delete qualifications for a project role. Save your data. The qualification is then transferred to the screen area on the right. Select the qualification(s) to be deleted in the Qualification Requirements group box. Integration If staffing managers and candidate managers use the extended staffing process. Deleting Qualifications Use You have created qualifications and you want to delete them. Enter the required proficiency of the qualification. If the selected qualification is an essential prerequisite for carrying out the task.

SAP Online Help 12. Make these settings in transaction PPOME. Enters a note for each staffing or candidate (optional). To do this. Enters requirements for project roles. System Actions Project role opened with automatically set status Staffing in Preparation.09. Advertises unstaffed project roles (those roles for which the Vacant indicator is selected on the General tab page) in a marketplace in the Enterprise Portal. The staffing and candidate managers are mapped as business partners and assigned to the relevant organizational units (the same as for resources). the staffing process is divided into different phases in which different persons responsible take over the processing of the project role.2008 Roles Define Project Role Types. Deactivates the Qualifications and Tasks tab pages. Candidate manager Takes responsibility for finding candidates through Staffing Sets access to the General tab page to read-only except for the Vacant field and the project description. Adds a message to the project role (optional). Features Unlike direct staffing. Assigns resources to project roles. Only then does the Staffing Process tab page become visible for this project role. an organizational unit is linked to a position by the link A441 for staffing managers or A440 for candidate managers. see SAP Note 731177. Adds a message to the project role (optional). Can make changes to time frame and capacity for existing staffings. Collaboration Projects 111 . The following table shows these different phases: Phase 1 2 3 Status Staffing in Preparation Staffing in Process Staffing Complete Performed By Project lead Staffing manager or candidate manager Project lead Activities Status Staffing in Preparation Performed By Project lead Manager Activities Enters the initial project parameters. Staffing in Process Staffing manager Takes responsibility for staffing through Staffing Process tab page. Sets the status of the project role to Staffing in Process. This position then links the relevant business partner. For more information.

Make roles visible in the worklist for candidate managers. The project lead can set the status back to In Process. Assign the organization for a role or accept the responsibility for a role. Performs resource searches based on new or changed project or role criteria. Collaboration Projects 112 . Deselects the Vacant indicator for the relevant project role on the General tab page. Staffing Complete Project lead Ends the staffing process for the project role by setting the status to Staffing Complete. you use the Staffing Process tab page to: Set and change the status of the project role. 12. Staffing manager Approves candidates and assigns them to the appropriate project roles. Deletes undesirable or unsuitable candidates.SAP Online Help Process tab page. Prerequisites You are on the Resources tab page. Saves the entries. See also: Staffing Process Tab Page [Seite 112] Accepting Responsibility for Roles [Seite 114] Resource Search [Seite 116] Staffing Process Tab Page Use Depending on your role in the staffing process. You are using the staffing process and have a role that allows you to view and use the Staffing Process tab page.09. Enters a note for each candidate (optional).2008 Sets access to all information for this project role to read-only access. Chooses candidate(s) to add to candidate list. Adds a message to the project role (optional).

the project lead sets the status to Staffing in Process. See also: Staffing Process – Status [Seite 113] Accepting Responsibility for Roles [Seite 114] Staffing Process .SAP Online Help 12. Collaboration Projects 113 . Candidate managers use the Responsible for Resource Search and Candidate Management group box to accept the responsibility for candidates for a specific role.Status Use The status of the staffing process specifies the types of tasks the staffing managers and candidate managers can perform using Project Resource Planning (PRP). Staffing managers use the Responsible for Staffing group box to accept the responsibility for staffing a specific role. The project lead initiates the project by using the following tab pages to complete the initial project parameters and defining the requirements for the role within the project: General tab page Tasks tab page Qualifications tab page (available when using WFM Core) Once this part of the process is complete. Phase 1 2 3 Status Staffing in Preparation Staffing in Process Staffing Complete Performed By Project lead Staffing manager and/or candidate manager Project lead Activities Staffing in Preparation The project role has status Staffing in Preparation. This is also the area where project leads and staffing managers make the role visible in the candidate manager’s worklist by selecting the Visible in Worklist checkbox.2008 Activities You use the Status group box to set the current status of a particular project role to be staffed.09. This allows the specialist with the most expertise in the specific area to perform the activities related to that area in the staffing process. Integration You set the status of the staffing process on the Staffing Process tab page. Each status has its own activities.

He or she checks the candidate list (if the indicator has been selected so that the staffing requirements can be seen in the worklist) and deletes undesirable or unsuitable candidates. Collaboration Projects 114 . See also: Accepting Responsibility for Roles [Seite 114] Resource Search [Seite 116] Accepting Responsibility for Roles Use When using the staffing process.09.SAP Online Help 12. They can also choose to accept personal responsibility for a role to which they were not initially assigned. Project roles for which the Vacant indicator is selected still require resources. The staffing manager then approves the candidates and assigns them to the individual roles. PRP sets access to the General tab page to read-only except for the Vacant field and the project description. At this point. Staffing managers and candidate managers review and edit roles assigned to them on the Staffing Process tab page. the staffing manager takes over responsibility for staffing with the Staffing Process tab page and uses an external application (such as the RPA) to access the project roles in his or her worklist.2008 Staffing in Process As part of the staffing process. At this point. staffing managers and candidate managers are assigned to roles based on the manager’s organizational assignment. The candidate manager carries out the following task: Performs a resource search (in the external application or alternatively in cProjects). Staffing managers and candidate managers have been assigned to organizational units. A role only appears in the worklist if it is assigned to a staffing manager or candidate manager. Staffing Complete The project lead deselects the Vacant indicator for the role (on the General tab page) and sets the status to Staffing Complete. Features Staffing managers and candidate managers find resources for roles that appear in their worklist. It also sets access to the Qualifications and Tasks tab pages to read-only. Prerequisites You are using the staffing process and are on the Staffing Process tab page. PRP sets all role information for this project role to read-only.

2008 Activities You use the Responsible for Staffing and Responsible for Resource Search and Candidate Management areas on the Staffing Process tab page when assigning roles. You select the client(s) on which the report is run. managers see only the roles within their own organizational unit. by choosing Collaboration Projects Tools Synchronize Project Roles with Staffing Process.SAP Online Help 12. There is no automated method to return a role from the staffing process to direct staffing. The report: Synchronizes all roles on the specified client(s) that were changed in the IMG activity Define Project Roles for Project Type so that these roles are available for the staffing process.09. Sets the status of the synchronized roles to Staffing in Preparation. Collaboration Projects 115 . You use this transaction to make these roles available for the extended staffing process. The report only supports the change from direct staffing to the staffing process. the organizational unit(s) to which they are assigned. Prerequisites You are using the staffing process. See also: Staffing Process [Seite 110] Staffing Process Tab Page [Seite 112] Synchronize Project Roles to Staffing Process Use You might have roles that you used in direct staffing that you want to synchronize to the extended staffing process. by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. You can also run this report from Customizing for Collaboration Projects. In these areas. by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Synchronize Project Roles to Staffing Type. Activities You run the report for synchronizing project roles from the SAP menu. You have changed the project role that you want to make available for the extended staffing process in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. that is. Managers can change the responsibility for a role from another manager’s name to their name by choosing Take On Personally.

For more information. You can also check the availability more simply without using the WFD server. then Find Resource.09.SAP Online Help 12. The search criteria can be changed in the search function without changing the attributes of the project role itself. Features You can enter the following resource search criteria: Search Criteria General project role type that is to be staffed Specified time period Customer/ordering party Area/location Maximum number of hits in the search result Organizational unit Qualifications Availability Selection According to Organizational Structure [Seite 118] Selection According to Qualifications [Seite 119] Selection According to Availability [Seite 121] See General Selection Criteria [Seite 118] Collaboration Projects 116 . You have installed the WFD server as an add-on or connected it as an external system. From the Projects initial view. You use the WFD server to check the availability. the search function uses all data required for the search from the project role. Prerequisites You created project roles on the Resources tab page of the Projects initial view.2008 See also: Staffing Process – Status [Seite 113] Staffing Process [Seite 110] Resource Search Use You use the resource search function to find suitable and available project resources. Integration As search criteria. choose the Resources tab page. see Project Roles [Seite 94] and Creating a Project Role [Seite 97].

. Staffing managers assign the candidates to the project roles. Qualifications. and Availability tab pages. For more information. Enter the required search criteria on the General. 3. Organizational Structure. Candidate managers approve or reject candidates. The system performs the search and displays the results. 1. Candidates are always included in the search result. See also: General Selection Criteria [Seite 118] Collaboration Projects 117 . regardless of the selection criteria you enter or the resource’s suitability percentage.09. 2. Choose Find. Qualifications. 4. 4. The system performs the search and displays the results. You use the BAdI DPR_RES_SEARCH to change the following settings according to your requirements: Search criteria (and the corresponding user interface) Search logic Search result list For more information. 1. 5. or add the resource to your list of candidates.2008 You see a green checkmark when the search criteria is entered on one of the tab pages. Enter the required search criteria on the General. 3. Candidate managers choose candidates from the results of the search... Assign the resource directly to your project. see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide (IMG) under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles BAdI: Configure Resource Search and SAP Note 1009131. . Organizational Structure. 2. When using PRP for the extended staffing process: . see: Running a Search [Seite 122] Search Results [Seite 122] Candidates [Seite 130] Activities When using Project Resource Planning (PRP) for direct staffing: . E-mail the chosen resource or his or her manager to inform them that you want to include the resource in your project. Choose Find Resource. and Availability tab pages.SAP Online Help 12.

Features You can enter the following search criteria: The project role type you are searching for. for example.2008 Selection According to Organizational Structure [Seite 118] Selection According to Qualifications [Seite 119] Selection According to Availability [Seite 121] Notifying a Selected Resource by E-Mail [Seite 133] General Selection Criteria Prerequisites You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page and have chosen Resource Search and then the General tab page. the system lists all the resources that have already carried out the duties of such a role. Collaboration Projects 118 . Maximum number of hits in the search result You can reduce the search time by restricting the number of hits. or availability. If you leave the field blank. by choosing Basic Settings Define Areas and Define Locations and assign them to the resources by choosing Resource Management Business Partner Employee Overview. You define areas and locations in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Area/location You can restrict the search to resources that have the specified location or area. qualifications. all resources are displayed.09. that is. the project role is not used as a filter. Customer/ordering party You can restrict the search to resources who have already carried out work for this customer or ordering party. senior consultant In the search result. Selection According to Organizational Structure Use You can enter organizational units as selection criteria. The time frame required for searches: searches can be based on a selection according to organization.SAP Online Help 12.

You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page and have chosen Resource Search and then the Organizational Structure tab page. For more information. In the Selected Organizational Units group box. The organizational unit is then transferred to the screen area on the right. 3. Save your data. 1.2008 Prerequisites You are using organizational management in SAP Human Resources (HR).09. select the organizational unit(s) you want to delete.SAP Online Help 12.. see the Collaboration Projects Implementation Guide (IMG) under Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource Management Application Link Enabling (ALE) for HR Integration and the SAP Notes 312090 and 390380. 2.. Activities Specifying an Organizational Unit As a Search Criterion . Features You can restrict the resource search to particular organizational units. 2. Expand the organizational structure and choose the required organizational unit(s). Choose Delete Selected Objects. You can also use the search function to do this: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search. Selection According to Qualifications Use You can enter the qualifications of resources as selection criteria. Collaboration Projects 119 . The system displays a search result list from which you can select the qualifications you require. The system then selects only the business partners assigned to the selected organizational unit or a lowerlevel organizational unit. You have distributed the HR master data. 1. Deleting an Organizational Unit . Choose >> (Add Selected Organizational Unit As Search Criterion).

Check the proficiencies and mandatory qualification requirements. enter additional qualifications by expanding the qualifications catalog and selecting the required qualification(s). In the search results list [Seite 122]. If not. You can specify a minimum suitability percentage in the selection criteria. The system then displays the qualifications from the task definition and project role definition again. the system always adopts the highest proficiency. delete the ones you do not require. the qualification is displayed only once. See Definition of Qualifications [Seite 108]. you always have the option of restoring them to their original state.09. Check whether you want to use all qualifications for tasks and roles as search criteria. the qualification as a whole is mandatory. . If you have changed the qualifications. 2. 3. The system then displays both the task icon and the role icon. The icons by the qualifications indicate whether the qualification comes from the task definition or project role definition. For more information. 1. When summarizing the same qualifications... Note that in resource management. alternative qualifications are not taken into account in the calculation of the suitability percentage. Activities . Even if the same qualification is an essential requirement in only one of the two objects (indicated in the Mandatory field). The system displays a search results list from which you can select the qualifications you require. 4. Any changes that you make to qualifications in the resource search are temporary and apply only to the search. Specify the required proficiency for each qualification.2008 Integration The system automatically displays all qualifications entered so far for the role and the tasks assigned to this role. see Suitability Percentage [Seite 123]. Collaboration Projects 120 . 5. choose Restore. Select the project role for which you want to find resources. the system always displays a resource's overqualification as a 100% suitability. The system calculates a resource’s suitability percentage from the difference between the required proficiency of a qualification and the degree to which the resource fulfills this. If required. If a task and a project role both have the same qualification. they are not transferred to the qualifications in the task definition or project role definition. that is. Then choose >> (Add Selected Qualification to Qualification Requirements).SAP Online Help 12. Prerequisites You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page and have chosen Resource Search and then the Qualifications tab page. To do this. You can also use the search function to do this: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search. Features You can add additional qualifications for the search or delete qualifications locally.

Capacity utilization for the resource You can select whether only hard-booked staffings are taken into account in the availability calculation. 6. you can choose a particular weekday and combine it with a monthly recurrence (for example. you have defined the availability for the business partners in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. For example.SAP Online Help 12.2008 Any changes that you make to qualifications in the resource search are temporary and apply only to the search. that is.09. or whether reservations are also included. Collaboration Projects 121 . Organizational Structure. you can choose a time pattern for recurring required capacities. the qualifications are reset to their initial value. enter additional selection criteria on the General. the first Monday of each month). by choosing Resource Management Business Partner Employee Overview. Features You can enter the following search criteria: Required capacity The system uses the scheduling engine to check the percentage of the required capacity that a resource can fulfill based on the specified period entered on the General tab page. They cannot be saved. Selection According to Availability Use You can add availability as a search criterion when combined with qualifications and/or organizational searches. You can only perform a search based on rules if you are using WFD. only qualifications for roles and tasks are displayed the next time they are called. Prerequisites You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page and have chosen Resource Search and then the Availability tab page. and Availability tab pages. Distribute required capacity If you want to perform a search based on rules. If you are not using Workforce Deployment (WFD). You cannot perform a search with availability as the sole search criterion. If required. When you exit the resource search. To run the search. choose Find Resource. 7.

Collaboration Projects 122 . Only those resources that match the percentage you entered are considered in the availability calculation. 1. Minimum availability You can set the minimum percentage of availability for the resource to be considered as a viable candidate. Running a Search Prerequisites You are on the Resources Find Resource page in the Projects initial view.09. The list also contains the resources you have saved as candidates. The list of search results provides information and functions that help you with further processing. the system displays a list of resources that it determined to be suitable candidates on the basis of the search criteria you defined. Note You define which information is displayed in the detail data on the General Data tab page. regardless of their suitability percentage. Enter the required search criteria.2008 You can only select capacity utilization for the resource as a search criterion if you are using WFD.. the minimum availability is not used as part of the availability calculation. Choose Find Resource. 2. If you leave the field at its default value 0%. Result The system displays the search result. Search Results After running the search function. .SAP Online Help 12. in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Business Partner Define Display Details for Business Partner .. You can navigate to the detail data of a resource if you require more information. Procedure .

SAP Online Help 12. If you are using WFD. choose the header of the column you want to sort.2008 In addition to the general data for a resource. The list provides a range of sort functions. taking into account the soft bookings and hard bookings. See also: Resource Search Suitability Percentage Definition If you use the Workforce Management Core planning service. You can also personalize the list to suit your requirements. and free capacity. End of the note. Structure The list contains the following information: Name of the person The name is formatted as a link to the detail data for the resource.09. the system uses a profile matchup in the resource search to compare the requirements profile with the resource's Collaboration Projects 123 . You can store resources as candidates or firmly assign them to a project straight from the list. capacity utilization. you can view the profile matchup of the person’s qualifications and the qualification requirements. The Projects tab page displays an overview of all projects in which the resource is or was involved. note that the availability can only be made up of the hard bookings or the hard and soft bookings together. This depends on the selection criterion you entered on the Availability tab page. Organizational unit Suitability percentage Location rate (as a percentage) Availability rate (as a percentage) Overall match (as a percentage) Availability. To use them. Manager of the resource Area and location Location (as attribute of the business partner) Cost/revenue rate Existing assignments The system indicates whether the resource is already assigned to the role that is currently selected or whether the resource is marked as a candidate.

The suitability rate can be used to generate hitlists for the staffing of a project. A relative proficiency is determined by viewing the proficiency of the qualification as specified in the resource search in relation to the maximum proficiency that is defined by the qualification scale. you can also store your own calculations to determine the suitability rate of a resource.09. The priority of requirements is not split further because it would not make sense from a business point of view and would not be user-friendly. if the proficiency of the qualification is less than that of the requirement. Collaboration Projects 124 . the resource is overqualified. the system then multiplies the calculated value with the percentage of the overall requirements profile. the system first checks whether each requirement is covered by the qualification profile. Use When you start the resource search. If it is. The system takes account of the weighting when calculating the proportion of the individual requirements to the entire profile. If the proficiency of the qualification is greater than that of the requirement. an over-qualification is weighted less heavily than an under-qualification. The result is the relative proficiencies of the requirements and of the qualifications. Essential requirements are weighted more heavily than optional requirements. There are only two types of priority in relation to requirements: essential requirements and optional requirements. but the resource may instead be over. process the following activity in the Implementation Guide for Collaboration Projects: Resource Management Workforce Management Core (WFM Core) Business Settings for WFM Core BAdI: Suitability of Resources by Qualifications. You have processed the following activity in the Implementation Guide: Collaboration Projects Resource Management Qualification Management Activate Qualification Search and Matchup Using WFM Core. In this process. In the search results list [Seite 122].or underqualified. because an essential requirement within a requirements profile is more important than an optional requirement of the profile.00 %: The person is 40% suitable for the requirements profile The relative proficiencies are the deciding factor in the calculation of the suitability percentage.SAP Online Help 12. To do so.00 %: The person is 100% suitable for the requirements profile 40. If the requirement is mandatory. Note that in Resource Management alternative qualifications are not taken into account in the calculation of the suitability percentage. In Customizing. the resource is under-qualified. Suitability percentage 100. Integration You have edited the qualifications catalog and scales in the following section of the Implementation Guide: Collaboration Projects Resource Management Qualification Management. the system always displays overqualifications as a 100% suitability. the system compares the relative proficiencies: The optimum scenario is that they match. the qualification is weighted more heavily.2008 qualification profile and thus determine a suitability percentage. To determine the degree of requirement satisfaction in relation to the entire profile.

2008 Vacant Role Search You use this function to find roles that have not been fully staffed that are available within a certain time frame.09. Features You can enter the following criteria for the search: Time frame Project type Role type Area Location Function Qualifications The system displays the search result in a table. or Checklist Items initial view and choose Vacant Roles. From here you can: Create a print version in PDF Export the data to Microsoft Excel Display detail data Select a project role and choose Detail Data. Send detail data to yourself in an e-mail Select a project role and choose Send E-Mail. Prerequisites You are in the Projects. the system displays an e-mail link which you can use to contact this person. This enables you to search worldwide for the best available talent in an enterprise. If a contact person has been specified and this business partner has an e-mail address. You can send the detail data of the selected role to yourself if an e-mail address is specified for your user in the system. Tasks. Collaboration Projects 125 . The project lead marks a role as vacant so that it can be recognized as an unstaffed or partially staffed role from outside the project.SAP Online Help 12.

Selection by Qualification Use You can choose qualifications as selection criteria for the vacant role search. you can enter your e-mail address in the E-Mail Address field under User Settings User .09. The system also takes roles into account which have the qualification but not at the required level of proficiency. Then choose >> (Add Selected Qualification to Qualification Requirements). Staffing of Project Roles with Resources Collaboration Projects 126 . Example: For language proficiency. Features You can add qualifications you want to use as search criteria or delete those you no longer require. The system also takes roles into account for the suitability percentage that have a language proficiency below this level. Select qualifications by expanding the qualifications catalog and selecting the required qualification(s). 6. Activities 3. the system only takes those roles that have at least this qualification into account. you specify "fluent". There are only two types of priority for qualifications: essential requirements and optional requirements. End of the note. Specify the required proficiency for each qualification. Note that in resource management. alternative qualifications are not taken into account in the calculation of the suitability percentage. 5.SAP Online Help 12. You can specify a minimum suitability percentage in the selection criteria.2008 Note In cProjects. 4. This data only becomes available the next time you open the search. The system displays a search results list from which you can select the qualifications you require. Integration The system automatically displays all qualifications that exist in the system. See Definition of Qualifications [Seite 108]. If a qualification is an essential requirement. You can also use the search function: Make an entry in the Search Term field and choose Search. choose Find Vacant Roles. Prerequisites You are in the vacant role search. To run the search. The system calculates a role’s suitability percentage from the difference between the required proficiency of a qualification and the degree to which the role fulfills this.

you can transfer your master data. Resource Manager via Responsible Organization: The role is staffed through an external application. the user is the staffing manager for the responsible organizational unit specified in cProjects. In this case. You can create business partners in the following ways: You can create business partners manually from the SAP menu by choosing: Collaboration Projects Partner . You have the following options: Project Lead: The project lead staffs roles directly in cProjects.2008 The project role type determines how project roles are staffed with resources. unstaffed capacity of the role and the minimum availability of the resource. Staffing can also take place through cProjects. Note For more information about Service Resource Planning. You can create new business partners in Resource Management from the Projects initial view by choosing: Collaboration Projects 127 . Staffing can also take place through cProjects. 12. You cannot staff any project roles with external resources in cProjects. Project roles are staffed with external resources in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM). The following external options are available for resource planning: The Web-based Resource Planning Application (RPA) from service resource planning in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) and the Resources iView from SAP Resource and Portfolio Management (SAP RPM). Master Data Business Partner Maintain Business If you use SAP Human Resources. you have to create the resources as business partners in Project Resource Planning. Resource Manager via Authorization: The role is staffed through an external application that has authorization for staffing via the project definition. You can use the Staffed By field in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types to control which application is used to staff the project roles. see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource Management Application Link Enabling (ALE) for HR Integration and SAP Notes 312090 and 390380. End of the note. When you create a staffing. For more information. Integration To staff project roles with internal resources. the default value for the required capacity is taken from the minimum remaining.SAP Online Help You can staff project roles with resources. see SAP Library under SAP Business Suite SAP Customer Relationship Management Components and Functions Service Service Resource Planning .09.

End of the recommendation. see Creating a Business Partner. you can display detailed information about the resource. staffings are allowed to overlap. You cannot tell that these staffings come from the RPA. you actually create a staffing. that is. When you select a row. If you use Collaboration Projects together with the resource planning application (RPA) from SAP CRM. The staffing then appears in this (possibly unintentionally) changed form in the RPA too. concrete assignments) in the RPA. When making assignments. Note Collaboration Projects 128 . Features Project Role List The project definition screen area on the left displays the project roles with their status and assigned resources. note the following special feature: When the resource planner creates appointments (that is. you can display the distribution for the staffing. This is based on the time frame and required capacity. If you click the link that is the name of the resource. A single resource to multiple roles You can assign a single resource to a role more than once.SAP Online Help Resources Project Role Definition Staffing . Recommendation When using cProjects with the RPA. you have the following options: Multiple resources to a single project role If you select the Edit in Parallel indicator in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types . Project Role Staffing in Time Frame <…> This displays the resources assigned to the selected project role with the required capacity and time frame assigned.2008 For more information. Prerequisites You are on the Resources tab page in the Projects initial view where you choose Project Role Definition and then the Person Assignment tab page. capacitive staffing assignments) in cProjects. You can also choose to display a configurable staffing action that supports the staffing process. You can display the percentage of availability for the role. they appear as project role staffings (that is. If you then change and save one of these assignments. provided that distribution is permitted for the role. 12.09. for different time frames. we recommend that you only use role types that do not permit distribution because distribution is not supported in the RPA.

You also reach this view if you choose Enter in the Resource field. Select Resource The following options are available in this group box: Search for existing resources. Note You cannot delete.SAP Online Help 12. see Candidates. or copy staffings that were created using the Shopping Cart tab page via SRM directly at this point. The resource search opens with the search results. You can then use the pushbuttons to make the assignment. by choosing Resource Management Business Partner Define Display Details for Business Partner . or business partners To select a resource in the search result. You can also choose to display a configurable staffing action that supports the staffing process. use the Staff with N. End of the note.09. you can e-mail the selected resources or their managers from the application to notify them that they have been assigned to a project or have received a task.2008 You make the required settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. For more information. Collaboration Projects 129 . first select the relevant row. change. Candidates You see all resources you have saved as candidates in this area. After storing resources as candidates or assigning them to a project. organizations. To staff a project role with a suitable resource. use the search function to check that it does not already exist.N. Resource Search for Project Role You reach this view if you used the Resource field to search for a business partner that is not unique. End of the note. For more information. If you want to staff the project role with a placeholder temporarily. function. Store resources as candidates Staff project roles with resources Create new resources and business partners Note Before creating a business partner. you can: Use the resource search Directly assign a preferred candidate Save a preferred candidate and also use the resource search function to find other suitable resources. End of the note.

To select candidates. such as any agreements reached by telephone. See also: Staffing Actions Creating a Business Partner Reserving Resources Staffing Project Roles with Resources Storing Resources As Candidates Candidates Definition Candidates are resources that you want to designate for a particular project role. Note When you click the name of a staffing in the Project Role Staffing group box or click the name of a candidate in the Candidates group box. regardless of your selection criteria or the suitability rate determined by the system. the system displays the projects in which the business partner is responsible for at least one project element. or if the resource has accepted but you still have to speak with the manager. you can either use the input help or enter the name and choose Enter. enables you to branch to the relevant project role. see SAP Note 979978. or remove them from the candidates list. The candidates are always included in the results list of the resource search. They may include your personal preferences.09.2008 see Candidates. and contains detailed information about previous staffings. You can enter a note for each of your candidates.SAP Online Help 12. End of the note. a customer’s preferences. You can directly assign your candidates to the project at any time. For more information about creating the Staffings tab page. When you have WFM Core [Extern] running you can display the availability percentage for the candidate based on the period and the required capacity. Here. Structure The candidates list displays the following information: Name of the resource Collaboration Projects 130 . on the Projects tab page. the system displays a dialog box that shows the details of the business partner. You can e-mail [Seite 133] candidates to notify them of the project. or resources that the resource search found to be suitable but that you do not yet want to firmly book. Use You can define your candidates in the system. You can also create a new tab page with the name Staffings that displays the project role staffings of the business partner.

You use this function to create resources or organizations as business partners.SAP Online Help The name is formatted as a link to the resource’s detail data. actions for staffing and candidates can differ. Name of the person with personnel responsibility for the resource Name of the organizational unit Comments A configurable project action used to support the staffing process 12. you have to create the resources as business partners in Project Resource Planning. Collaboration Projects 131 .09. See also: Staffing of Project Roles with Resources [Seite 126] Candidates [Seite 130] Creating a Business Partner Use To be able to staff project roles with resources. Depending on the implementation. Prerequisites The Action column is only displayed if you created actions and icons for these actions in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Staffing Actions.2008 See also: Staffing Actions [Seite 131] Storing Resources As Candidates [Seite 133] Staffing of Project Roles with Resources [Seite 126] Staffing Actions Use The icons displayed in the Action column represent the status or the action for staffings and the assignment of candidates.

3.. Enter the required data and choose Create. 1. . gender. In the SAP menu. 4.SAP Online Help 12. you can transfer your master data. In the Projects initial view. For more information. 3. you can only create business partners for project role types that are not relevant to the WFD Server. Save your entries. . Creating a business partner with HR integration Master Data Business Partner If you are using SAP Human Resources. you can do this in the SAP menu as described above. Secondly. you can enter the business partner directly from cProjects. If you want to create extra external resources. Creating a business partner in the application This function is only intended for cases where you want to assign a business partner in the application and notice that the business partner does not exist yet in the system. see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource Management Application Link Enabling (ALE) for HR Integration and the SAP Notes 312090 and 390380. In this case use the business partner role resource. If you are using HR integration. Note that you cannot enter all business partner data (for example. you create the new business partner in the employee role. or form of address) if you do this. Therefore. To avoid having to exit the application.. 1. note the information under “Creating a business partner with HR integration”. Only then is the business partner available in cProjects. See also: Staffing of Project Roles with Resources [Seite 126] Collaboration Projects 132 .2008 Prerequisites You need structural authorizations (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Organizational Management Structural Organization Assign Authorization Profiles to Users). Procedure Creating a business partner from the SAP menu You first have to create a new business partner as a general business partner. In the application. Choose Create Person or Create Organization. address. 2. Enter the required data.09. 2. choose Collaboration Projects Maintain Business Partner. then the Staffing view. You can use it straight away as a resource or candidate. we recommend that you always create business partners via the SAP menu or transfer them using ALE. Choose Show Search and then Create. The system creates the business partner in the resource role. You have to complete the missing data later on by choosing Maintain Business Partner in the SAP menu. choose the Resources tab page.

Choose Candidate.SAP Online Help 12. select the resource and choose Add to Candidates. see Staffing of Project Roles with Resources [Seite 126].09. Save your data. enter the first and last name of the resource and choose Add Candidate. The system automatically inserts project data. You are on the Resources tab page of the Projects initial view: Project Role Definition Resource Search Person Assignment or You can also make resources from the search results list [Seite 122] candidates. In the Candidate field. You can create templates for the e-mails in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource Collaboration Projects 133 . If the name you entered matches only one candidate. Note that the system uses the e-mail address from the business partner data. 3. 4. Procedure . Create a comment. 1. such as time periods and required capacities. The resource is displayed in the Candidates group box. if required. the system displays the compatible resources in the search result. If there is more than one match.2008 Storing Resources As Candidates Prerequisites The resource has been created as a business partner in Resource Management. To do so. See also: Candidates [Seite 130] Notifying a Selected Resource by E-Mail Use You can e-mail the selected resources or their managers to notify them that they have been assigned to a project or have received a task. the system assigns the resource as a candidate straight away. 2. Select the required resource in the list. For more information..

If you have Windows NT 4.0 Workstation as an operating system. 1. Make changes as required (only in a non-Unicode system). Staffing Project Roles with Resources Collaboration Projects 134 .2008 Assign Forms for E-mail and Groupware Communication. The mail template is displayed (only in a non-Unicode system). 4. Choose Send. For more information. Prerequisites You have defined e-mail templates. You have entered the e-mail address in the business partner data. . the system sends a blank e-mail. If you have not entered the e-mail address of a business partner. the text does not appear completely when an e-mail is created. see SAP Note 945675. 2. If you have not defined any templates in your project language. you can enter a note to the effect that you have notified the resource about the project. you can do so later on. The functions or pushbuttons for sending e-mails in a Unicode system differ to those in a system that does not use Unicode. Choose the pushbutton to send e-mails.. You are in the Projects initial view at one of the following places on the Resources tab page: On the Staffing tab page in the Project Role Staffing group box On the Staffing tab page in the Candidates group box In the Resource Search in the Search Result group box Procedure There are functions for sending e-mails at various places in the application. In the Candidates and Project Role Staffing group boxes.0 is restricted to 260 characters for hyperlinks with a mailto URL. This is because Windows NT 4.SAP Online Help Management 12. carry out the steps described in the "Creating a business partner from the SAP menu" section under Creating a Business Partner [Seite 131]. 3.09. To do this.

2008 Once you have found a suitable resource for your project and the resource has agreed to participate in the project. the system replaces the existing resource with the resource you entered. the system replaces the existing resource with the resource you entered. Prerequisites You are on one of the following tab pages of the Projects Resources initial view: Staffing. Note If a row is selected in the table. select the project role that you want to staff with a resource. 4. 2. Choose Staff. in the Candidates group box In the Search Result in the Resource Search Procedure Staffing a project role with a resource on the Staffing tab page 1. Enter the name or number of the business partner in the Resource field. In the project role overview in the screen area on the left. 4. the role is staffed straight away. End of the note. If this is not the case. In the project role overview in the screen area on the left. Select the candidate you require. select the project role that you want to staff with a resource. Save your entries. you can staff the project role with the resource. 3. End of the note. 5. Choose Staff. Collaboration Projects 135 . Select the relevant row in the search result. If the name or number is unique. the resource search opens and the system displays the possible resources in the search result. Staffing a project role with a resource on the Candidates tab page 1. Save your entries. 3. To allow you more flexibility in the assignment. 2. in the Project Role Staffing group box Staffing.SAP Online Help 12. you can staff project roles with resources at various places in the application. Note If a row is selected in the table.09.

for example.2008 Assigning a resource from the search result of the resource search 1. in parentheses after the project role that they are staffing. 1. 3. in the Candidates group box In the Search Result in the Resource Search Resources initial view: Procedure . Staff the required project role with the resource of your choice as described in Staffing Project Roles with Resources [Extern].. Save your data. select the project role that you want to staff with a resource. if you do not yet have a contract for the project or the resource's manager has not yet approved the assignment. Reserving Resources Use If you have found a suitable resource for a project role in your project. indicator on the Staffing tab page. Select the Res. Choose Staff Project Role.09. The resource staffing is only reserved and not a hard booking. Collaboration Projects 136 . Select the required resource. If you want to create a hard booking for a reserved resource later on. Save your entries. Result The resource is reserved for the project role. 2. Result The resources are displayed in the project role overview in the screen area on the left. you can first reserve the resource for the role.SAP Online Help 12. deselect the indicator. 4. In the project role overview in the screen area on the left. 3. 2. Prerequisites You are on one of the following tab pages of the Projects Staffing in the project role definition Staffing. You may want to do so.

the system issues error messages as appropriate and does not automatically adjust any intervals. see Workflow for Resource-Booking Statuses [Seite 138]. Prerequisites You have the required staffing authorization. If there is a gap between any two intervals. the system inserts another interval in front of it to close the gap. This procedure triggers a workflow and your request is forwarded to the responsible line manager who can approve or reject the booking. the system checks the generic intervals in the background. It adjusts the intervals if necessary (see Features).09. the system issues an error message and you cannot save. If the start date of the first interval is after the start date of the role or staffing. Prerequisites You created a project role whose project role type supports distribution in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. the system inserts an interval that closes the gap. Creating a Soft Booking for a Resource Use You use this procedure to create a soft booking a resource for a project. Collaboration Projects 137 . If two intervals overlap.SAP Online Help 12. the system inserts another interval after it to close the gap. Features When you call the Check Intervals function. The system checks whether the intervals follow on from one another without any gaps and whether they fill the entire time frame between the start and finish date of the project role or staffing. the system moves the start date of the interval to the start date of the role or staffing. you have to adjust the intervals to remove the overlap and then save them. The system cannot know which of the two intervals you want to change. Therefore.2008 Generic Interval Check Use When you distribute the required capacity of a project role or staffing manually over several intervals and then choose Check Intervals. the system responds as follows: If the start date of the first interval is before the start date of the role or staffing. the system brings the finish date of the interval forward to the finish date of the role or staffing. For more information. If you save the intervals without explicitly calling the function for checking the generic intervals. If the finish date of the last interval is after the finish date of the role or staffing. If the finish date of the last interval is before the finish date of the role or staffing.

If the booking type is successfully converted from soft-booked to hard-booked. checkbox in the staffing table for the resource that was assigned in the previous step. the workflow automatically converts the booking from Soft Booked to Hard Booked in the background and the process continues. for instance if the project or role is locked. 8. receives a mail containing a link to the portal from where he or she can approve or reject the booking. Find and assign a resource to the role. Process Flow 9. 5. You can find this BAdI in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Global Enhancements to Project Elements Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Check/Change Fields in cProjects. Create a new role or open an existing role. A work item appears in the line manager’s inbox under Home Overview Inbox containing the booking details and the pushbuttons Approve Booking and Reject Booking. The workflow is triggered when a resource is assigned to a project role or an old booking is changed and the booking type of a resource is marked as Soft Booked by a resource manager. 11. 6. If this is the case.09. Workflow for Resource-Booking Statuses Purpose You can use an SAP Business Workflow [Extern] in cProjects to trigger an approval or rejection of a resource booking or to change a soft booking of a resource to a hard booking. If the line manager approves the booking. The line manager receives a mail if the conversion of the booking type failed. Procedure 4. the resource manager(s).SAP Online Help 12. 12. Prerequisites You have completed the IMG activity Activate Workflows in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Basic Settings. Go to the Staffing tab page within the role. Result The line manager of the soft booked resource receives an e-mail asking him or her to approve or reject the booking by executing a work item in the inbox of his or her universal worklist. Open a project and navigate to the Resources tab page within the project. The line manager of the resource for whom a soft booking was created and for whom you want to create a hard booking.2008 You have defined Soft Booked as the default booking type for resources by implementing the method SET_DEFAULTS_UPON_CREATION of the BAdI: Check/Change Fields in cProjects for the filter BAG (Business Partner Links). 7. he or she needs to execute the booking again by means of a new work item. Collaboration Projects 138 . 10. Select the Res.

project manager(s). 2. The groupware task contains information about the time frame and the required capacity of the staffing.. Prerequisites You have imported cProjects to SAP CRM 5. Choose Groupware Task.0. and the resource receive a mail notifying them that the booking was rejected.09. Collaboration Projects 139 . and the resource receive a mail notifying them that the booking was confirmed. the booking type remains unchanged as softbooked and the resource manager(s). . Procedure . Edit the required groupware task. Result Once you have saved. You are in the Projects initial view on the Resources tab page and have chosen Staffing. 3. you can send a groupware task to the resource's mailbox. 4. the system sends the data from the project role (required capacity and time frame) as a groupware task to the resource's mailbox. If the line manager rejects the booking. Choose Send. Resource managers can be assigned the following project role types: Project Lead Resource Manager via Authorization Resource Manager via Responsible Organization You can make the required assignments in the IMG for cProjects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. 1. 13. Creating a Groupware Task Use After staffing a project role with a resource..2008 project manager(s). The resource can now create concrete appointments from this groupware task. 5. You are using Workforce Deployment (WFD) 2. Save your data.SAP Online Help 12.0. Select the resource in the staffing list.

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Resource Manager
Technical name: SAP_CPR_RESOURCE_MANAGER

Tasks
The resource manager staffs project roles with suitable and available resources.

Multi-Project Management
Use
Projects often depend on other projects that have different persons in charge of them. You can map these cross-project relationships in the structure of your project. The following interproject link [Extern] scenarios are available for this purpose: Subproject [Extern] Mirrored task [Extern] Program [Extern]

Prerequisites
Your system administrator has permitted the use of cross-project structures for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects, IMG activity Define Project Types).

Features
For more information on working with the individual types of inter-project links, see: Work with Subprojects [Seite 140] Work with Mirrored Tasks [Seite 142] Work with Programs [Seite 144]

Work with Subprojects
Use
When you work with subprojects, a task of a project is created as a separate subproject, for example, because a different department or a subcontractor is responsible for the task. To map this relationship, you create an inter-project link between the task of the master project and the project definition of the subproject. A task of a master project can only ever be linked to a single subproject. The subproject can, however, also be the master project for other subprojects which enables you to map multilevel project hierarchies. The following graphic explains the scenario:

Collaboration Projects

140

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Master Project Loose Inter-Project Link Through Alerts

Fixed Start Fixed Finish Assign Subproject

Date change Alert

Manual date change in project

Alert

Subproject

Fixed Start Fixed Finish

Manual date change in project

Date change

Integration
A task that represents a subproject must not contain any subtasks in the master project. Apart from this, it behaves like a normal task that you can process and confirm.

Prerequisites
Your system administrator has permitted the use of subprojects for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects, IMG activity Define Project Types). You have at least display authorization in the subproject. You have entered persons responsible for the task in the master project and for the project definition of the subproject (see Creating Basic Data for a Task [Seite 54] or Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition [Seite 43]). Note the prerequisites under Alerts [Seite 67] if you want the system to be able to inform the responsible persons about changes.

Features
When you create the inter-project link, the project lead of the subproject receives a message to inform him about the inter-project link. The message contains the dates for the task that belongs to the master project. The project lead can adjust the dates of the subproject manually; there is no automatic adjustment. Messages are also sent in the following cases: If a date is changed in the master project or subproject If the master project or subproject is deleted If the inter-project link is deleted A task that represents a subproject is shown by the following icon in the project structure of the master project: Task for Subproject. An additional area that contains information about the master project appears on the Basic Data tab page for the project definition within the subproject (see Creating Basic Data for a Project Definition [Seite 43]).

Collaboration Projects

141

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Activities
..

1. Create a task that you want to represent a subproject or navigate to a task that already exists. 2. On the Basic Data tab page, enter the number of the subproject that the task is to represent. When you save, the system creates the inter-project link and displays the name of the subproject. You can display the subproject data by clicking the name of the subproject. If you have authorization to edit the subproject, you can switch to change mode after you have opened the subproject by choosing Display/Change. 3. To delete the inter-project link, delete the entry under Subproject.

Work with Mirrored Tasks
Use
If tasks or phases of a project are influenced by another task (original task [Extern]) in a different project, the project leader of the dependent project must be informed about changes made to the original task. You can include the original task as a mirrored task in the structure of the existing project, for this purpose. The following graphic explains the scenario:

Project with Original Task

Dependent Project

Fixed Start Fixed Finish

Fixed Start Fixed Finish

Assign original task Original task Mirrored task (inherits dates of original task)

The system transfers the earliest start date of the original task from those determined by the system as the fixed start date for the mirrored task and the latest finish date of the finish dates determined by the system as the fixed finish date for the mirrored task.

Earl./Latest Start: 7th March / 4th March Earl./Latest Finish: 1st April / 29 March Fixed dates of the task: 4th March – 1st April
th

Collaboration Projects

142

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

If the dates for the mirrored task are outside the limits of the superior project element, the system issues a warning. If you create relationships between the mirrored task and other tasks, the mirrored task dates influence the dates of the linked tasks when scheduling.

Prerequisites
Your system administrator has permitted the use of mirrored tasks for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects, IMG activity Define Project Types). You need at least display authorization for the original task to be able to create a mirrored task. To display the original task, you also need display authorization for the project definition to which the original task belongs. Note the prerequisites under Alerts [Seite 67] if you want the system to be able to inform the responsible persons about changes.

Features
You can make the following changes to the mirrored task: Enter a name Change authorizations Set a manual severity Edit relationships with other tasks [Seite 78] Delete mirrored tasks This also deletes the link to the original task. The data of the original task is visible in the dependent project but you cannot change it. Even if you have authorization to make changes in the original task, you still cannot change the data. If the original task has subtasks, they are not visible here. If the dates of the original task change or if the original task is deleted, the person responsible for the project element to which the mirrored task is assigned is informed. The person responsible for the original task is only informed when the mirrored task is created and deleted.

Activities
To create a mirrored task, proceed as follows:
..

1. In the project structure, navigate to the project element below which you want to create a mirrored task. 2. Choose Mirrored Task in the dropdown box above the structure tree and then choose Create. The mirrored task appears with the following icon in the project structure: Task 3. Assign an original task. Mirrored

Collaboration Projects

143

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Work with Programs
Use
Larger projects are often realized in several different projects that belong together. In order to map these complex project structures, you can assign other projects or programs to a project with the project category program; this gives you an overview of the whole context. A program has neither tasks nor checklists, only a project definition and the phases that are relevant to all projects. The project definition and the phases can contain objects such as documents, collaborations, or object links. The following graphic explains the scenario:

Program 1

I

II

III

Project 1

Program 2

I

II

III

I

II

III

Project 2

Project 3

I

II

III

I

II

III

Prerequisites
Your system administrator has created a project type with the project category program (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects, IMG activity Define Project Types). You have at least display authorization for the projects or programs you want to assign. Note the prerequisites under Alerts [Seite 67] if you want the system to be able to inform the responsible persons about changes.

Features
If you assign a project or another program to a program, you can transfer the phases of the project or program to the program automatically or manually according to the phase type. However, automatic assignment only works if no assignment already exists. Changes made to the dates in the program phases trigger a message which informs the persons responsible for the assigned phases. In the same way, the person responsible for the program receives a message if the dates of the assigned phases change. The assigned projects and phases do not appear in the project structure but on two separate tab pages:

Collaboration Projects

144

In manual assignment. 4. Mirrored task You can expand a mirrored task to display the original task and the structure it contains. Select a project and choose Phase Assignment. Multi-Project Monitor You use this function to call and compare multiple projects. the system assigns the phases to each other according to their phase type. Create a project with the project type program (see Creating a Project Definition [Seite 31] ). Program You can expand a program phase to display the assigned phases and the structures they contain. you can switch to change mode here.2008 On the Assigned Projects tab page. The tab page is available on the project definition level. 2. 5. or checklist items at the same time. In the automatic assignment. If you have the appropriate authorization. the system assigns the first phase with this phase type. you can use the Assign Phases function to assign a selected project phase to a program phase. the system does not make an assignment. Navigate to the project definition in the project structure. This enables you to display all objects below a subproject in graphical form. Collaboration Projects 145 . You can branch to the project elements from the multi-project monitor and edit them. Activities . If the program does not contain any phases with the same phase type. This enables you to display all objects below the original task. Either choose Automatic Assignment or make an assignment manually. You can open the assigned projects or phases from the overview in display mode. If the assigned project contains several phases with the same phase type. Assign other projects to the project on the Assigned Projects tab page. 1. The tab page is available on the program phase level. You can also use the multi-project monitor to display the following inter-project link scenarios in graphical form with more display options than in the graphical view: Subproject You can expand a task with a subproject to display the subproject and the structure it contains.SAP Online Help 12.09. tasks. The Assigned Phases tab page displays all phases that are assigned to the program phase. 3. You also select the phases of the assigned projects that you want to assign to the program phases. you assign the projects to the program that belong to the program. You get an overview of all phases in the current program and all phases in the assigned project..

or checklist items in the dashboard and chosen Open Multi-Project Monitor. the system automatically uses the calendar view that best suits the duration of the process. Collaboration Projects 146 . The view does not contain the dates from the object links. The Print Preview button allows you to set print parameters and display the current appearance of the graphic for printing.09. You can close this window when you have finished making your changes. you can change the header of the multi-project monitor. choose Refresh. To make your changes visible in the multi-project monitor. it is displayed multiple times. If you want to create a title for the printout. If you selected the Overview view. When you select a project element in the structure. End of the note. Checklist items are indicated by (Checklist Item). In the standard system. These are displayed in red unless they have already been marked as milestones. Features General Functions You can choose which view of the calendar you want the system to display in the multi-project monitor from the View dropdown box. Prerequisites You have selected multiple projects. Tasks whose buffer is less than or equal to 0 are part of the critical path. Checklists are only displayed in the structure tree and not in the graphic. the system automatically positions the calendar in such a way that the start of the project element appears at the left edge. the system automatically positions the calendar in such a way that the start of the project element appears at the left edge.SAP Online Help 12. the system opens a new window. the entire duration of the project and all displayed rows are printed. Display Tasks you marked as milestones are indicated by (Milestone). The Navigate button allows you to specify the section of the project you want the system to display in the multi-project monitor. tasks. Note When you edit a project element in the multi-project monitor. You use the Print button to print the current project.2008 Note If an object is used in more than one project that you are displaying in the multi-project monitor. End of the note. The relationships of a particular task are only displayed in the multi-project monitor if you are currently displaying the superior project of the task in the multi-project monitor. End of the note. Note When you select a project element in the structure.

or tasks. select the checkbox under Filter for all project elements to which you want to apply the filter. Procedure 1. the system filters by all project elements whose names start with "Proj". Select the object types you want to include. "Project A". 8. You can use the standard wildcard characters here. the system only filters the task by the conditions project element name. 4. Since mirrored tasks do not have all the attributes of a task. Choose Set Filter.2008 Setting the Filter in the Multi-Project Monitor You can set a filter with certain conditions in the multi-project monitor. "Project B". and system status. 5. the system only filters the checklist by the condition project element name. If you set the filter for the object type checklist. for example.09. 6. The dropdown list contains system statuses and customer statuses from the status profiles that are used in the project structure. End of the note. The system then displays all projects in the filter result whose time frame (calculated start date to calculated finish date) is partly or completely within the time frame specified. Enter a generic character string as the project element name. Collaboration Projects 147 . Select a start and finish date for the time frame. Select one or more values for the criticality level. Note If you set the filter for the object type tasks. In the structure tree on the left. projects. Open one or more project elements in the multi-project monitor. time frame. the system also takes checklist references into account. Here. 7. End of the note. The character * represents any character string and the character + stands for any character. The system automatically selects all lower-level elements of these project elements even if they are not currently visible in the tree. xyz". The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case. phases. The system uses the earliest or latest dates that are defined in the user settings to calculate the start and finish date.SAP Online Help 12. or "proj. End of the example. Example If you enter Proj*. 3. for example. Select one or more values for the status. Note The filter condition time frame is not relevant to checklists or checklist references because these project elements do not have any dates. 2. the system also takes mirrored tasks into account.

or name. The system then displays the following fields that you can use to define additional filter conditions: Milestone Task Type Percentage Complete Result The system displays the filter results in a list. 11. If you choose Reset Filter. Under Responsible. Select the responsible project role type you require. The system then displays the following fields that you can use to define additional filter conditions: Process Mandatory Relevant for Approval If you set the filter for tasks. 12. You can use the search help to do this by searching for the person or business partner by their role. as required. Select one or more values for the priority. the system shows attributes that you can only set for these two object types. Simulations Collaboration Projects 148 . Choose Apply to start the filter function.09. the system displays the unfiltered view with all project elements. the system shows attributes that you can only set for tasks. Project Versions Use This function enables you to create project versions [Extern] based on project templates and for operational projects.2008 10. You can restrict the result further as required by choosing Set Filter again. The filter result then contains all the project elements whose responsible role belongs to the project role type selected here. The system retains the previous filter conditions. Snapshots cannot be changed. user. Enter a generic character string for the group and search field. 13. The following version types are available: Snapshots Snapshots enable you to create a momentary representation of an operational project so that you can track the status of the project at different times. The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case. The character * represents any character string and the character + stands for any character.SAP Online Help 9. Choose Cancel if you do not want to start the filter function. the system resets the filter to the initial conditions. 12. You can use the standard wildcard characters here. If you choose Delete Filter. 14. select a person or business partner who is responsible for the project elements to be filtered. which you can refine. If you set the filter for tasks and/or checklist items.

See also: Work with Versions [Seite 150] Creation of Simulations und Snapshots [Seite 151] Creation of Snapshots in the Background [Seite 153] Collaboration Projects 149 . Simulations enable you to test. Simulations You can perform costing for project roles and resources for simulations. Prerequisites Your system administrator allows versions to be used for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects. for example. If you create a simulation of an operational project that has not been transferred to Controlling yet. You can change most of the simulation data. it cannot be changed. Snapshots If you create a snapshot of an operational project that has not been transferred to Controlling yet. The object links are references to the operational objects. the project number always corresponds to the number of the operational project because there can only ever be one snapshot for a project in a version. A project version is always based on a version [Extern]. The actual simulation data cannot be transferred to Controlling. or without a template. The system copies all project data to the project version for both version types. you can either display the accounting data of the operational project or perform costing for the simulation again.SAP Online Help 12. for project templates. If the project has already been transferred. Existing object links are also transferred to the project version. the system displays the accounting data of the operational project. the system copies the costing to the simulation and you can perform costing for the simulation again. In a snapshot. for a simulation you can assign any project number because a project in a version can have several simulations. The actual costs are not transferred to a simulation. IMG activity Define Project Types). the effects certain changes will have on an operational project. You can save simulations and call them again later on. If the changes produce the desired result. The status is an exception to this. you can reconcile the simulation with another simulation or with the operational project. However. The system does not take the simulation data into account in Workforce Management Core [Extern]. Features Note that the current Customizing settings always apply in the case of project versions. you cannot choose here.09. The user interface is the same as that for an operational project although the fields for a snapshot are not ready for input. but not the objects themselves. The settings do not have versions. The actual snapshot data cannot be transferred to Controlling. the system copies the costing to the snapshot.2008 You can create simulations for operational projects. The project version number is made up of the version number and the project number. If the project has already been transferred.

go to the Versions initial view and select the Version Type. If you want to create more than one snapshot for a project or template. Prerequisites You defined input templates in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Structure Define Permitted Version Numbers.SAP Online Help 12. To open version management. A version for the version type snapshot can contain any number of snapshots for different projects or project templates but only ever one snapshot for a project or template. the version number. Activities .50 Basic Settings for cProjects Business Customizing Making Settings for Version Management. Then choose Version Management. the validity. A version for the version type simulation can contain any number of simulations. the maximum length is 24 characters Collaboration Projects 150 . see SAP Solution Manager under Solutions/Applications SAP PLM Configuration Structures SAP cProject Suite 4. edit. you have to create an individual version for each snapshot. We recommend that you assign authorizations for creating global versions and local versions separately. Note the following when entering data: The input template specifies the form the version numbers take: + stands for a single character * stands for a string of characters of any length at the end of the version number. Features Versions specify the basic data for project versions [Extern]. There are global versions and local versions: Global versions are intended for use across the whole enterprise. and delete versions.. Local versions are intended for use in your own evaluations. You need authorization for the CPRO_VSHDR authorization object to create and delete versions. and the version type (simulation or snapshot). For more information.2008 Reconciliation and Comparison of Versions [Seite 153] Deletion of Project Versions [Seite 156] Work with Versions Use You use this function to create.09. for example.

see Deletion of Project Versions [Seite 156]. If. You have administration authorization for the project or project template for which you want to create simulations or snapshots. you only need the general authorization for creating projects. see Multi-Project Management [Seite 140]. They are then deleted in the archiving deletion run. Your version number must start with SIM and be 6 characters long in total. master project for a subproject. you create a simulation of a program. Collaboration Projects 151 . you cannot use the version. If you do not enter a validity. for example. This applies to the following projects: Part of a program Subproject Project that contains an original task for a mirrored task For more information about linked projects. If you create a simulation without a template. You select an input template SIM*. or a project with a mirrored task). the simulation of a master project is assigned the link to the operational subproject. You can only delete those versions that do not contain project versions. You created a version (see Work with Versions [Seite 150]). Procedure Note the following: If you create simulations or snapshots for a project that is linked to another project (program. Example You select an input template SIM+++.2008 The version can only be used to create a simulation or snapshot if it has been released and is valid at the time of creating the simulation or snapshot. the simulation is also assigned the operational projects that belong to the program. the link is copied and refers to the linked operational object. For more information. IMG activity Define Project Types). The system automatically transfers the Archived indicator from Customizing. Creation of Simulations and Snapshots Prerequisites Your system administrator allows versions to be used for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects.SAP Online Help 12.09. In the same way. the system does not copy the link. Your version number must start with SIM and can be of any length although the maximum total length is 24 characters. you can archive the simulations and snapshots for this version but cannot delete them manually. If it has been selected. If you create a project version for a project that is the target of a project link.

3. 2. For a snapshot the system copies the authorizations from the operational project. change the data if necessary and save the simulation. Save the project. You can enter a project type straight away or after you created the simulation.. Choose the Snapshots or Simulations tab page. 7. this simulation does not contain any data. Result You created a project version. 3. 1. Enter the version for which you want to create a project version. Select the version type you want to create. Choose Create. 6. If you choose Project. Creating Simulations and Snapshots from Project Processing . you create the simulation for the operational project you chose as the template. Enter the following data: For snapshots: The project number of the project for which you want to create the snapshot. When you choose Project. You can make changes to a simulation. Once you have created a simulation. Choose Continue. Open the Versions initial view. You can also perform a reconciliation and a comparison [Seite 155]. The system saves a snapshot automatically because you cannot change any data here. Project Template. 4. you create a simulation manually. or Simulation.2008 Creating Simulations and Snapshots from the Initial View . 2. 5.09. you create a simulation with all the data and the project type of the template..SAP Online Help 12. Choose Create. 5. For simulations: The project number you want to assign to the simulation The template type you want to use If you choose No Template. Therefore. Open the Project Versions tab page in your project. Choose Create and enter the data. 1. 4. See also: Creation of Snapshots in the Background [Seite 153] Collaboration Projects 152 . For a simulation you automatically keep the administration authorization.

It is not possible to create them in accordance with specific business transactions.SAP Online Help 12. You want to create a snapshot every month for a whole year: Create twelve versions each with a validity period of one month and whose names all start with the same characters. However. Features A log is available after you have carried out this function and contains the following information: Versions that match your selection criteria Versions in which snapshots can currently be created Success message stating that a snapshot was created for the project you entered If a snapshot could not be created. CCMS Note that you have to create a separate version for each snapshot you create in the background because you can only use a version once for a project. Messages in the log inform you about which versions are valid and in which version a snapshot was created. it is only possible to compare or reconcile the project data if the projects are based on the same templates or if the project versions belong to the same project. SNAP*) as a version in the batch job. Reconciliation and Comparison of Versions You use this function to compare or reconcile certain project data. it could be because: The version has not been released The version was not valid at the appropriate point in time A snapshot already exists for the current project in the specified version Activities To create a snapshot manually in the cProjects back-end system. the system checks the validity of the possible versions and creates a project version with the version that is currently valid.09. When you carry out the batch job. Enter a placeholder for the first characters of this name (for example. Collaboration Projects 153 . Then release them.2008 Creation of Snapshots in the Background Use You can create snapshots manually or let the system create them automatically at a given time. To schedule the creation of snapshots in the background. choose Tools Jobs Definition in the cProjects back-end system. choose Collaboration Projects Versions Create Snapshots in the SAP Menu and enter a version number and project number.

09. or only the matches.2008 Integration You use version reconciliation to upload Microsoft Project data to cProjects (see Importing of Project Data). Prerequisites Your system administrator has permitted the use of versions for the current project type in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. You have authorization to display the project or version. You decide which project elements are to be transferred. even if there are differences. for example: o o o o All project element data whose status in the target project does not permit any more changes Data that cannot be changed in general (for example. Snapshots are not reconciled. For a reconciliation. no data exists. there is no automatic reconciliation. by choosing Define Project Types. Here you can choose whether you want the system to display all the values. No data is changed. Clicking a traffic light gives you a detailed view of which data is different and which data is the same. and green traffic lights to show which parts of the data are different and which parts are the same. Features In a comparison the system displays two projects or versions next to each other. yellow. In a reconciliation you can transfer the data of a version to a simulation or an operational project. administration data) Relationships Resources End of the note. In both functions. The system uses yellow traffic lights to display differences that you cannot change with a reconciliation. If the system does not display any traffic lights. In both cases.SAP Online Help 12. the system automatically expands the corresponding structure on the Collaboration Projects 154 . If you expand the structure on one side. the system takes the following data into account: Project element data Status Documents Collaborations Object links Authorizations Note Some data cannot be reconciled. only the differences. the system uses red. the status of the target project still permits changes (status Created or Released).

If you want to reconcile individual parts of the project element data. 6. The system compares the information in the selected projects. The system searches for projects that you can reconcile with the project you entered. Choose Compare. You can also display only the matches or all the fields. 1.. 5. 4. click a traffic light. Performing a Reconciliation . 2.SAP Online Help 12.09.. 3. Choose Identify Projects for Comparison. 5. The system only displays the differences at first. open the detail view by clicking a traffic light and then select the data you want to reconcile. In the reconciliation. See also: Performing Reconciliations and Comparisons Performing Reconciliations and Comparisons Performing a Comparison . The system searches for projects that you can compare with the project you entered. you cannot delete elements from the source version if they do not have a corresponding element in the target version. Enter the simulation you want to reconcile with another project. 3. In the column with the traffic lights. 6. 7. Select the project elements whose data you want to reconcile with the data of the target project. Choose the version type you want to compare in the Versions initial view. If you want to see more detailed information about the traffic lights. Choose Identify Projects for Comparison. Choose Reconcile. Enter the version and the operational project that you want to compare with another project. 4. Caution You cannot delete project elements by reconciliation in an operational project.2008 other side. choose Reconcile. 8. 2. End of the caution. select the relevant entry and then choose Set Filter. 1. Select a project from under Project for Comparison and choose Compare. You have to start from the Projects initial view if you want to compare one operational project with another. Select a project from under Project for Comparison and choose Reconcile. The system compares the information in the selected projects. If you want to reconcile all data of the selected project element. Choose the version type Simulation in the Versions initial view. Collaboration Projects 155 .

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

The system only displays the differences at first. You can also display only the matches or all the fields. In the column with the traffic lights, select the relevant entry and then choose Set Filter.

You cannot select data that does not contain any differences or for which a reconciliation is not possible. If the simulation contains project elements that do not exist in the target project, you can only select the first project element each time below an element that exists on both sides.

Example
You reconcile the following structures:

A A1 A2 B C
C1

A A1 A2 B

Task C and subtask C1 do not exist in the target project. You can select task C but not C1 because C1 does not have a superior element that exists in both structures. If you choose task C for the reconciliation, the system creates subtask C1 in the target project automatically.

Deletion of Project Versions
Use
You use this function to delete snapshots and simulations.

Collaboration Projects

156

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Integration
You can only delete project versions [Extern] if archiving has not been activated in the relevant version. If archiving has been activated in the version, you can only delete the project versions via archiving: Deleting project versions with an operational project or a project template When you archive a project, the system checks whether project versions exist for this project that have been marked as relevant to archiving. If such project versions exist, the system archives them together with the operational project or the project template. If project versions exist for the operational project or template that is being archived, that are not relevant to archiving, the system deletes the project versions with the archiving deletion run. Deleting project versions without an operational project or project template If you want to delete a project version for which there is no template, or if you want to delete the project version independently of the template, use your own archiving run.

Activities
..

1. Open a project version. 2. Choose Delete. 3. Confirm that you want to delete the object.

Object Links
Business objects important to a project can be located in different systems. Since it is important to have an overview of these objects directly in cProjects, you can connect the objects which you defined or activated in Customizing for Collaboration Projects to the application as object links. You define or activate the objects under Connection to External Systems Object Links in SAP Systems Make Settings for the Linked SAP Objects or Structure Define Object Types for Object Links . The following objects support object links: Project definition in template Project template Checklist in template Checklist template Phase Phase in template Task Task in template Checklist item Checklist item in template

Collaboration Projects

157

SAP Online Help Control plan version Control plan version in template Project role Project role in template Caution

12.09.2008

If you are working with an initiative, "project" is synonymous with "initiative" in the following sections. End of the caution. Note You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. End of the note.

Integration
You can take linked objects into consideration in the evaluations you perform for your project. The Threshold Values pushbutton enables you to display the threshold value violations for an object link and set a manual severity.

Activities
Carry out one of the following activities: Creating an Object Link Editing an Object Link Opening a Linked Object for Editing The option is available only if your system administrator made the appropriate settings. Displaying Linked Object Data The option is available only if your system administrator made the appropriate settings. Deleting an Object Link

Creating an Object Link
Use
You can create object links to existing objects and other cProjects projects. If the object you want to link to does not exist, you can plan a link and link to the object at a later point in time.

Special Characteristics of the Quality Notification (QM) Object Type
If you want to create a link to a quality notification, you can create a new notification in the SAP system directly from cProjects and link it to a project element. To do this, choose the object type Quality Notification (QM) (Creation Optional). If the notification type you enter requires an external number assignment, you have to enter a number. If the notification type

Collaboration Projects

158

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

does not permit external number assignment, the system assigns the number automatically and you cannot enter it manually.

You can use the OLR3_NOTIFICATION BAdI to specify that certain data, for example, the number or the notification type is assigned automatically. The BAdI can be found in the SAP system in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components under BAdI: Creating a QM Notification.

Prerequisites
You opened a project, task, or checklist item from the Projects, Tasks, or Checklist Items initial view and are on the Object Links tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). An object type without a group is available when you create an object link if the object type is active and the current project element type is permitted. An object type with a group is available when you create an object link if the object type and its group are active and the current project element type is permitted. When you copy or paste object types, the system does not check whether object types or groups are active or whether there are restrictions on project element types.

Procedure
Depending on the settings made by your system administrator, the automatic existence check and the search function may not be available.

Creating an Object Link to an Existing Object
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element for which you want to create an object link. 2. Choose Create. 3. If you want to use the groups of object types for object links, select a grouping. 4. Under Link to, select the object type you want to link to. 5. Enter the data of the object. 6. Do not select the Identify Object Later indicator. 7. Enter a name, if required. If you do not enter a name, the system transfers the name of the linked object during the existence check. 8. Choose Continue. The system checks whether the object you entered exists in the source system and then creates the link. You can edit the linked object [Seite 160]. 9. Save the project.

Planning an Object Link to an Object That Does Not Exist Yet
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element for which you want to create an object link. 2. Choose Create. 3. If you want to use the groups of object types for object links, select a grouping. 4. Under Link to, select the object type you want to link to.

Collaboration Projects

159

SAP Online Help 5. Select the Identify Object Later indicator.

12.09.2008

The system does not carry out an existence check in the source system of the object. The system carries out the check once you have entered the identification. 6. Enter a name, if required. If you do not enter a name, the system transfers the name of the linked object later on during the existence check. 7. Leave the remaining fields blank. 8. Choose Continue. The system sets up the object link and marks it as Object has not been identified. You can edit the link later on (see Editing an Object Link [Seite 160]). 9. Save the project.

Editing an Object Link
Prerequisites
You opened a project, task, or checklist item from the Projects, Tasks, or Checklist Items initial view and are on the Object Links tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). The object of the object link has not been identified yet.

Procedure
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element whose object link you want to edit. The system displays all existing object links for this project element. 2. Select the object link you want to edit and choose Edit. 3. Make the desired changes and choose Continue. The system saves the changes. If you enter an identification for an object that has not yet been identified, the system checks whether the object exists in the source system (provided that your system administrator made this setting). 4. Save your entries.

Opening a Linked Object for Editing
Use
You can edit a linked object by calling the application in the source system from cProjects.

This option is only available if your system administrator made the appropriate settings.

Prerequisites
You have opened a project, task, or checklist item from the Projects, Tasks, or Checklist Items initial view and are on the Object Links tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]).

Collaboration Projects

160

2008 Procedure . The system displays the object data. without having to call up the application in the source system. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element whose object link you want to edit. In the Identification column. or Checklist Items initial view and are on the Objects tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). or checklist item from the Projects. The system displays all existing object links for this project element. Collaboration Projects 161 . Procedure . The selection appears if there is more than one possible initial access view.SAP Online Help 12.. Edit the object and save your changes. 3. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element whose linked object you want to edit. Displaying Linked Object Data Use You can display the data of a linked object directly in cProjects. 5. 2. 1. 4. Tasks. task. The system opens the application so you can edit the object in a separate window. if required. Close the window. or Checklist Items initial view and are on the Object Links tab page (see also Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). 6. Choose Open in the Application column. 2. The system displays all existing object links for this project element. Log on to the source system. Select the transaction you want to use to edit the object. 1. Deleting an Object Link Prerequisites You have opened a task or a checklist item from the Projects. Procedure . Tasks.09.. click the link to the object link whose data you want to display. The option is available only if your system administrator made the appropriate settings. Prerequisites You opened a project..

You can use this function to carry out preliminary costing for the costs and revenues. 2. Integration To be able to use the functions of accounting integration. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the project element whose object link you want to delete. Project controlling is governed by the controlling method you assigned under Define Controlling Scenario. 3. you can analyze the costs and compare them to the planning data at any time. Once the project has started. by the integration of sales pricing. Manual) (B) Collaboration Projects 162 . Save your entries.2008 1. and depends on the project type. Prerequisites You need to make settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects and Customizing for SAP ECC: Settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects You selected the Controlling in mySAP ERP setting as the Accounting Integration Scenario in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. by choosing Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Activate Integration. Automatic) (C) WBS Element Manual Multilevel Controlling (Structure Element. Accounting Integration Use You want to monitor the costs and revenues throughout the duration of the project.0. Select the object link you want to delete and choose Delete. The system displays all existing object links for this project element in an overview.09. Quotation creation is also supported. You can measure the success at the end of the project. Manual) (I) Automatic Multilevel Controlling (Structure Element.SAP Online Help 12. You can distinguish between the controlling methods by the following criteria: Task-based or role-based Account assignment object: Internal order or WBS element Manual or automatic The following table gives you an overview of the controlling methods that are available: Internal Order Automatic Task-based Manual Internal Order (Structure Element. You can activate required capacity as work in progress. you have to implement the Internal Orders (CO-OM-OPA) application component and Project System (PS) in SAP ECC 6. Settings in Customizing for SAP ECC You made the settings in Controlling by choosing Integration with Other SAP Components Collaboration Projects Controlling. located below the overview.

such as budgeting. see Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182] or Multilevel Controlling [Seite 183]. You can call these functions in SAP ECC. This discards the changes and the new costing values and Collaboration Projects 163 . You can also use it to determine a price for the quotation [Seite 178]. You use the system settings to define which information you can see in detail here. Once you have created it. If you have already assigned account assignment objects and have saved the assignment. you can exit the project without saving. results analysis. When you choose Detail Data. The downstream processes. If you made changes to the costing-relevant data in your project. see Easy Cost Planning for Internal Orders [Extern] or Easy Cost Planning in the Project System. the system displays functions (services) for this account assignment object. When you click an account assignment element. If you use a project type for which accounting integration is active.09. Costing If you have already created a costing. The data that is relevant to accounting in the project is transferred to the account assignment objects in SAP ECC for this purpose. you can call it up for editing in SAP ECC. and settlement also take place on the account assignment objects. see SAP Library for SAP ERP under SAP ERP Central Component Financials Project System (PS) Costs Cost Planning Easy Cost Planning and Execution Services Easy Cost Planning in the Project System. For more information. Easy Cost Planning is then called for the selected account assignment object in SAP ECC for editing. in the field help for the Controlling Method column. You can create an ad hoc cost estimate [Seite 176] here before the transfer takes place. the system displays controlling information for the account assignment object read from SAP ECC. Features Preliminary costing [Seite 173] gives you the option of planning costs and revenues before the project starts. Automatic) Internal Order (Project Role. see Customizing. Additions you make to costing are displayed in cProjects as aggregated to the project definition. Automatic) (D) Multilevel Controlling (Project Role. the Accounting tab page is available in cProjects with the following views: Account Assignment This view is available in multilevel controlling and is available in single-object controlling for internal orders once the transfer has taken place.2008 Role-based Internal Order (Project Definition. you can perform costing again for these changes to determine the effects on costs and revenues. For more information about Easy Cost Planning in the Project System. You specify what these functions are in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. it is only possible to call the cost estimate for the account assignment object as a service in the Account Assignment view.SAP Online Help 12. by choosing Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Define Object Links for Accounting Integration Service for an Object Type. Manual) (J) Multilevel Controlling (Project Role. Manual) (A) For more information about the individual controlling methods. billing. For more information. the system displays the costing results of the last costing. Controlling [Seite 180] for the operational project takes place for one or more account assignment objects (internal orders or WBS elements). If you only made a change to determine its effects on the costs and revenues.

If an automatic controlling method was assigned to the old project type. This is governed by which controlling method you choose in Customizing. In the case of a task-based controlling method. The system uses the cost/revenue rate you assigned in Assignment of Cost/Revenue Rates [Seite 167] for the required capacity of the project role not covered by the staffing. Projects with a task-based controlling method can only show costing results for cProjects tasks. If you save the project with the changes and the new costing results. depending on the project type: If accounting integration has not been activated for the new project type (using the No Integration scenario in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Activate Integration). the status Flagged for Transfer is automatically changed to the status To Assign. If. If you change the project type. After transfer. the costing with the new values is saved in the account assignment object in SAP ECC. Projects with a role-based controlling method only show costing results for roles. in the opposite case. the status automatically changes from To Assign to Flagged for Transfer.SAP Online Help 12. and a manual controlling method is assigned to the new project type. the controlling method changes from manual to automatic. In order to represent both of these options in costing. The cost/revenue rate is specified in the attributes for the business partner role resource. General Information About Accounting Integration The following documents contain information that applies to all aspects of accounting integration: Costing Logic [Seite 164] Assignment of Cost/Revenue Rates [Seite 167] Derivation of Organizational Data [Seite 168] Costing Logic In cProjects you can enter planned times as either required capacity for tasks or required capacity for project roles or resources. the roles can only have any influence by means of the assignments to the individual tasks. you can carry out task-based or role-based costing. this can have the following effect on the status [Seite 250].09. Role-Based Controlling Once you staff a project role with a resource. the project type can no longer be changed. the status Flagged for Transfer or To Assign is automatically revoked. the system transfers the required capacity of the project role and the cost/revenue rate of the resource to calculate the costs for the time frame of the staffing.2008 the project and costing return to their previous states. Collaboration Projects 164 .

the Distr. Fixed or calculated start of role Costs for internal resources 1. The following table shows in detail how costs and revenues for project roles and resources are calculated. Reports in SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence allow you to compare these rates with those that come from the rates specified in Customizing. You have staffed this project role with a single resource. You distribute the required capacity for a project role according to the period type month and have planned a required capacity for 10 person days for the month of February. Plan price for the resource in cost center accounting Start of staffing of role with resource or fixed or calculated start of role Internal resources are resources assigned to the SAP business partner role Collaboration Projects 165 . The system first checks whether the first strategy can be used.. Plan price from cost center accounting . If you want to use a different value for the costs and revenues in a particular project. Different costs which you entered for the project role 2. If the role type of the project role permits distribution (if you selected the Distribution indicator in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. 1 day in March. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing . Different revenue which you entered for the project role 2. If the project role permits distribution. by choosing Resource Management Basic Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types) and the required capacities have been entered in periods.. Costs/ Revenues Costs for project role Calculation Strategy per Activity Unit .09. The calculation is the same for the other periods. The system only checks the second strategy and so on if the first strategy cannot be used. If. The required capacity of the project role is added to the required capacity of the resource as described above according to the distribution over periods. you want to include the required capacities in periods in costing... however. Evaluation Date Fixed or calculated start of role Other Information 1. and 10 for May. The system calculates 3 person days for February using the cost/revenue rate of the resource and the 7 unstaffed days with the cost/revenue rate of the project role. you staffed this project role with a resource for 20 person days.2008 You planned a required capacity of 30 person days for a project role. the system transfers the required capacity for each period and the cost/revenue rate for performing costing for the relevant period. of Costs indicator must be selected in Customizing. However. The resource plans to work 3 days in February. a distribution can also be specified when staffing this project role with a resource.. Revenues for project role 1.SAP Online Help 12. and 2 days in May. Costs per activity unit for the resource in Customizing 2.. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing 3. If this indicator is selected. you can overwrite the cost/revenue rate of the resource by entering a cost rate in the Cost Difference field or a revenue rate in the Revenue Difference field. only the total required capacity is used for costing as described above. The system calculates 20 person days using the cost/revenue rate of the resource and the 10 unstaffed days with the cost/revenue rate of the project role. 5 for March.

Different costs which you entered for the task 5. Different costs which you entered for the project role 4. So far.. Revenues for internal or external resources 1.09. Plan price for the role in cost center accounting . Costs per activity unit for the resource in Customizing 2.. costing uses this rate. The following table shows in detail how costs and revenues for tasks and project roles are calculated.SAP Online Help 12. 3. The system first checks whether the first strategy can be used.2008 employee. Different revenue which you entered for the project role 2. Revenue per activity unit for the role in Customizing Start of staffing of role with resource or fixed or calculated start of role Strategy three is only used if the resource does not have its own cost/revenue rate assigned to it. the general rate is used. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing . Task-Based Controlling If you specified a cost/revenue rate in Customizing for the task type. Costs per activity unit for the task in Customizing Evaluation Date Fixed or calculated start of task Other Information Collaboration Projects 166 . Strategy two is only used if the resource does not have its own cost/revenue rate assigned to it. Start of staffing of role with resource or fixed or calculated start of role External resources are resources not assigned to the business partner role employee. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing 5. Costs for external resources 1. The system calculates 20 person days using the cost/revenue rate of the project role and the 10 unstaffed days with the cost/revenue rate of the task. Strategies three to five are only used if the resource does not have its own cost/revenue rate assigned to it.. Costs/ Revenues Costs for task Calculation Strategy per Activity Unit 4. If a role is assigned to the task. you have assigned a project role to this task for 20 person days. The cost/revenue rate can also depend on the responsible organizational unit: If you entered a responsible organizational unit for your project (see Creating Additional Data for a Project Definition [Seite 44]) and if a special cost/revenue rate exists for it in Customizing for cProjects. this cost/revenue rate is included in costing too. the cost/revenue rate of this role is used. The system only checks the second strategy and so on if the first strategy cannot be used. If you have not defined a special rate. You planned a required capacity of 30 person days for a task. Revenue per activity unit for the resource in Customizing 3. Staffing a role with a resource does not influence costing in task-based controlling..

. Integration For more information about how cost and revenue rates affect costing. Costs per activity unit for the task in Customizing Start of assignment of task to role Strategies four and five are used if the role does not have its own cost/revenue rate assigned to it. Prerequisites .SAP Online Help 12. You can enter the cost/revenue rate on the Additional Data tab page. Task-Based Scenario: You are on the Structure tab page of a project and have selected a task. The tab page for accounting integration is then visible in cProjects. You are on the Resources tab page of a project and have selected a role. Costs per activity unit for the task in Customizing Fixed or calculated start of task Costs for roles 8. Different revenue which you entered for the task 16. Role-Based Scenario: 2.2008 Revenues for task 6. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing 15. Revenues for Roles 13. Collaboration Projects 167 . Different revenue which you entered for the project role 14. You can enter the cost/revenue rate on the Costing tab page. 1. Costs per activity unit for the role in Customizing 10. Different revenue which you entered for the task 7. Assignment of Cost/Revenue Rates Use Depending on whether you want to perform costing based on tasks or based on roles.09. Costs per activity unit for the task in Customizing Start of assignment of task to role Strategies three and four are used if the role does not have its own cost/revenue rate assigned to it. Different costs which you entered for the task 12. you assign a cost/revenue rate to the tasks or the project roles or resources for which you want to perform costing. Your system administrator activated accounting integration for the project type of the current project. see Costing Logic [Seite 164]. Plan price for the role in cost center accounting 11. Different costs which you entered for the project role 9.

for example. in the form of a customer enhancement. You define it in ERP Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components. The system determines the cost center by searching upwards in the organizational structure and using the responsible organizational unit you specified in cProjects on the Structure Collaboration Projects 168 . costing uses this rate.09. as follows: . Derivation of Organizational Data Use The SAP system requires the following data for creating an account assignment object and carrying out costing: Controlling scenario The controlling scenario depends on the project type. If you do not make this data available externally. by choosing Collaboration Projects Controlling Define Controlling Scenario. Organizational data: Mandatory: Controlling area Company code Business area Cost center Optional: Profit center Prerequisites The organizational units in cProjects are synchronized with those in Organizational Management. this data is valid. If you have not defined a special rate. the cost or revenue rate valid at the time the task or role begins. see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for cProjects under Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource Management Application Link Enabling (ALE) for HR Integration. the general rate is used. for the task type or project role type from Customizing. You can select a different rate and enter a different revenue or different costs. the system determines the data from the organizational units in Organizational Management that were replicated from SAP Human Resources (HR) to the cProjects system (see "Prerequisites"). Features The system determines the data for creating the account assignment object. the system reads as the default value.2008 Features When you create a new task or project role.SAP Online Help 12. If you entered a responsible organizational unit for your project and a special cost or revenue rate exists for this project in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. This enables you to agree on individual rates with your customers. it is not overwritten by the data determined in the SAP system. For more information. If you make the data available externally..

start the process with step three. You edit the model order in ERP Customizing for Controlling. For more information. Therefore. The system transfers the remaining data from this cost center. the system first checks the BAdIs DPR_FIN_GECCO_ATTR and IAOM_ATTRIBUTES (see above) for project and role attributes. then create a quotation from the simulation based on the cost estimate. The system determines the data for costing the account assignment object.SAP Online Help 12. In task-based or role-based costing with no resource assignment: To derive the cost center (as actual sender of the costs to the account assignment object). Since a sender has to exist for consistency reasons and to show the allocation in costing. In multilevel controlling. If no cost center can be derived from there.2008 Additional Data tab page in the Responsible Organizational Unit area Org.09. If you do not use project opportunities. the system checks in the account assignment object whether a cost center has been entered in the Requesting Cost Center field. when deriving the cost center. the system checks each organizational unit to which the resource is assigned. as follows: The controlling area and company code are determined from the account assignment object. by choosing Internal Orders Order Master Data Screen Layout Define Model Orders. the system searches for a cost center in the organizational unit of the project. If no cost center can be found there either. you can convert the simulation into an operational project and create a sales order. the data is derived from the project profile CPR0001. From the Opportunity to the Sales Order Purpose In this process you create a simulation in cProjects from a project opportunity. the system searches in the master record of the account assignment object. The BAdIs can be found in the Implementation Guide (IMG) for cProjects under Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Additional Attributes for Replication Using SingleObject Controlling and in the IMG for the ERP system under Integration with Other SAP Components Collaboration Projects Controlling Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Characteristics of CO Account Assignment to Be Created or Changed. see SAP Note 977951. In role-based costing with resource assignment: The resource is relevant for deriving the data relevant to costing. the system checks the Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) DPR_FIN_GECCO_ATTR in the cProjects system and then IAOM_ATTRIBUTES (implementation ATTRIBUTES_CPROJECTS) in the ERP system for task and project attributes or project and role attributes. the system checks the organizational unit assigned in the project definition. If you did not specify a responsible organizational unit or the system could not determine its data. If no cost center is found there. the dummy attribute value NOT_KNOWN is used instead of a cost center. If no cost center is found there either. the dummy attribute value NOT_KNOWN is used instead of a cost center if the cost center is missing in the account assignment object. Responsible. Collaboration Projects 169 . If no cost center can be determined there either. in single-object controlling for internal orders the system determines the data using the model order for the order type CPR1. If your customer accepts the quotation. The process is particularly suitable for project business. If no cost center can be derived there.

For more information on steps five and six. see SAP Library under SAP CRM SAP Customer Relationship Management Components and Functions Opportunity Management Creating a Quotation in SAP ECC from an Opportunity. The manager then submits the completed quotation to the customer. For more information. 2. the area manager creates simulation 2 in cProjects based on simulation 1. For more information. create an object link to the opportunity in the simulation (see Creating an Object Link [Seite 158]). In SAP ECC. If the customer does not accept the quotation. 5. you have to create the customer quotation or a customer inquiry manually. The project lead costs simulation 1 in cProjects and adds costing items manually (for example. travel expenses). The project lead transfers the project to SAP ECC where it is assigned to one or more account assignment objects. 8. 4. If you want to use opportunities to support your processes. The link to customer quotation 1 is established through the opportunity. see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Logistics Sales and Distribution Sales Customer Inquiry/Quotation.SAP Online Help 12.. Then the manager costs simulation 2 again and creates customer quotation 3. The manager links the simulation to the opportunity and to customer quotation 1. the project manager transfers simulation 2 to operational project A by means of a reconciliation (see Reconciliation and Comparison of Versions [Seite 153]). If you do not use opportunities. The project lead creates simulation 1 in the cProjects system (see Creation of Simulations and Snapshots [Seite 151]). the area manager generates SD customer quotation 1 with a phantom item as a follow-up document for the opportunity. 6.0. a. The area manager sets the status of the opportunity to In Process.2008 Prerequisites You are using cProjects and SAP ECC 6. 3. 9. You are using a project type that supports accounting integration [Seite 162].09. 7. The internal order can be created Collaboration Projects 170 . b. If you do not use opportunities. create an object link to customer quotation 1 or to a customer inquiry that was created manually. see Preliminary Costing and Quotation Creation [Seite 173]. Process Flow 1. If the customer accepts quotation 3. you have to use Opportunity Management. For more information. . see SAP Library for SAP CRM under SAP Customer Relationship Management Components and Functions Sales Opportunity Management. If you use opportunities. The area manager creates customer quotation 2 by accessing the sales pricing function from within the cost estimate and creating the quotation there. An area manager creates a project opportunity in the SAP CRM system. The following options are possible: An internal order serves as the account assignment object (see Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182]).

2008 automatically during the transfer or created and assigned manually before the transfer. Multiple internal orders serve as account assignment objects. If you want to create and edit the sales order in the People-Centric UI. The project is recosted when it is transferred to SAP ECC. The following graphic illustrates the entire process with the detailed steps: Collaboration Projects 171 . In this case. you need to extend the People-Centric UI in Customizing accordingly. WBS elements serve as account assignment objects (see Multilevel Controlling [Seite 183]). The manager manually assigns the account assignment objects to the items of the contract or sales order.SAP Online Help 12. the project lead has to manually create and assign the internal orders before the transfer (see Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182]).09. see SAP Library for SAP CRM under SAP Customer Relationship Management Components and Functions Sales Sales Transactions Sales Order Processing SAP ECC Sales Documents in SAP CRM. For more information. 10. You make the necessary settings in the SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) of SAP CRM under Customer Relationship Management Layout of the User Interface (PeopleCentric UI). The area manager manually creates a contract or sales order with reference to quotation 3.

SAP Online Help 12. see SAP Note 874434.09. Collaboration Projects 172 .2008 Customer SAP CRM SAP cPROJECT SUITE SAP ECC Create project opportunity Set status to In Process Generate follow-up document Customer quotation 1 is created with phantom item Create simulation 1 Create object link to opportunity Add costing items (such as travel expenses) Sales pricing determines revenues Customer wants changes Create simulation 2 Cost the simulation Generate quotation 2 Cost the simulation Customer accepts new quotation and signs contract Transfer simulation 2 to operational project A Generate quotation 3 Account assignment objects are created and project A is recosted Create sales order or contract with reference to quotation 3 Assign account assignment objects to the items of the order/contract For more information about workflow support.

To do this.” You have made the necessary settings for the DIP. For more information. Prerequisites You have made the necessary settings for cost calculation. You can use the fields Grouping and Search Field to specify the materials in the quotation. You can also perform the process with operational projects. If you do not want to create a quotation from sales pricing. This example uses only simulations. Then you can also use the revenue rates from cProjects (revenue calculation type Use Cost/Revenue Rates from cProjects). it is assumed that you have decided to calculate revenues with the dynamic item processor [Extern] (DIP) and that you create the quotation from within sales pricing. You have selected the revenue calculation type Use Sales Pricing in SAP ERP for the project type you are using for the simulation in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Make General Settings. You have created a simulation. see Ad Hoc Cost Estimate for cProjects [Seite 176] under “Prerequisites. From cProjects 4. For more information.00. see SAP Note 301117.2008 Preliminary Costing and Quotation Creation Purpose You can calculate the planned costs and revenues for a project before this project has been transferred. For more information. but that is sufficient to understand the function. see Sales Pricing for cProjects [Seite 178] under “Prerequisites. For more information.” This setting is only needed if you want to perform the process as it is described here. do not carry out steps five and six listed here. preliminary costing is in the form of an ad hoc cost estimate. Process Flow The following graphic shows the sequence of steps: Collaboration Projects 173 . You define the requirements class in Customizing for SAP ECC.09.SAP Online Help 12. This SD document item must have a requirements type with a requirements class to which an account assignment category is assigned that has the value E (Accounting via sales order) in the Consumption Posting field. for example by choosing Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment/Costing Maintain Requirements Classes For Costing/Account Assignment. see Costing Logic [Seite 164]. and assigned an organizational unit. This creates a separate CO object for each SD document. You can then create a quotation [Extern] on this basis. You have made the necessary settings for Easy Cost Planning [Extern]. The process described in the following illustrates steps five and six of the process From the Opportunity to the Sales Order [Seite 169] in detail. The first item of this SD document is used for referencing in sales pricing. To illustrate the entire process with all its functions. you must have executed the steps for adding the characteristics Grouping or Search Field to the DIP profile. created an object link to an SD inquiry or quotation for it.

If you want to influence the items in the quotation that you create in step six. 1. You plan the required capacity and the project roles and resources. Collaboration Projects 174 .SAP Online Help 12. you can use the fields Grouping or Search Field. This enables you to structure the quotation in cProjects according to the level of detail and language that the customer has selected. You can use the value that you enter here to derive materials for the quotation items through the DIP profile.2008 SAP cPROJECT SUITE SAP ECC Plan required capacity and project roles or resources Perform costing Costs and revenues are displayed Save Call up costing (ECP) Perform costing and save or start again Costs (including additional costs) and revenues are displayed Add costing items (such as travel expenses) Save Call up sales pricing and modify Create quotation Costs (including additional costs) and changed revenues are displayed Perform costing and save or start again Save . The materials selected in this way are available in sales pricing (see step five) for manual conditions (surcharges or discounts).09.. for example.

Choose Cost on the Accounting tab page. The items of the second quotation are added to the contract. while an additional five days are still unassigned. see Costing Logic [Seite 164].000. the ad hoc cost estimate.09. Result The costing result with costs and revenues is displayed in cProjects. Costs Currency 0.00 T 5. There can also be additional items (such as for travel expenses) that you enter in the ad hoc cost estimate. The quotation is available for further processing. 6. For more information about calculating costs and revenues. You create a quotation. materials and services for the quotation items can be determined in Easy Cost Planning if you have not entered anything in the fields for the individual phases or tasks or if additional items are added by means of a planning form in the ad hoc cost estimate. 5. Perform costing for the project in cProjects and save it.400 for the project role based on the specific rate for Caren Johnson and the rate for the project role for the unassigned days.00 € 8. A new quotation is therefore prepared in which the course has a fixed price. In the initial quotation. which differs from the project role rate of €100. 3. You calculate the costs and revenues. The Costs column in the line for the project role has the total amount of €8. Collaboration Projects 175 . or cProjects.00 € 4. Project Element Planning Consultant 1 Caren Johnson Req. Unit Req.00 T Costs Currency N-A.000 for the unassigned five days for which no resource has been assigned. The materials that form the items in the quotation are selected through the DIP profile. The planned required capacity for this role is ten days. You call up sales pricing.00 € 4.00 T 5.00 € 8. For more information. Quotation in the sales pricing Changes that you make to the quotation here are not transferred to sales pricing. Save your entries and return to the project in cProjects. The hourly rate for Caren Johnson from the business partner is €110. Unit Capacity 10.00 € 4.400. Example The following graphic shows an example in which individual phases were assigned to the values Consulting and Course with the field Grouping. 7. 4.00 T N-A. 0. The customer accepts this new quotation. The column for the non-aggregated costs (N-A.400.2008 In addition to the materials you specified with the fields Grouping or Search Field.Costs) in the line for the project role only shows the €4. For more information. see Sales Pricing for cProjects [Seite 178].Cap.400. To do this. The costing result is displayed. Five days are assigned to Caren Johnson. 2. you choose function.00 € The consultant Caren Johnson has the role Consultant 1.SAP Online Help 12.00 5. Save your entries. The customer does not accept the quotation. see Ad Hoc Cost Estimate for cProjects [Seite 176]. You can also create the quotation later by calling up the ad hoc cost estimate again.00 T 10. You now call up Easy Cost Planning [Extern] (ECP) and can add additional costing items.400. the course is to be invoiced using resource-related billing.

A WBS element was created for each phase.SAP Online Help 12. The costing result is displayed in cProjects and saved when you save.00 ERP Implementation and Course Project Preparation Planning Organization Business Blueprint Scope Creation and Approval Realization Configuration Test Course Development Execution Go Live & Support Grouping Consulting Go Live & Support Transfer CCC Grouping Course Grouping Consulting Grouping Consulting Account Assignment Manager Grouping Consulting SAP Project System ERP Implementation and Course ERP Implementation (Billing Element) Course (Billing Element) Project Prep. Once at least one account assignment exists. SAP Sales and Distribution Inquiry/ Quotation Doc. the system converts the ad hoc cost estimate to a costing whose planned costs and revenues are posted over a Collaboration Projects 176 . For this reason. Business Blueprint Realization Go Live & Support Configuration Test Ad Hoc Cost Estimate for cProjects Use This function enables you to create and edit ad hoc cost estimates [Extern] in SAP ECC from within cProjects.2008 Cost controlling in this example is based on manually created [Seite 185] multilevel controlling [Seite 183]. The billing elements were created such that they correspond to the groupings. For the Realization phase. Flow Consulting Fixed Price Doc. detailed cost controlling at task level is to be performed. additional WBS elements were created for the tasks Configuration and Test. Flow Account Assignment Course ResourceRelated Course Fixed Price Course Fixed Price cProjects 4. ERP Implementation Object Link Flow Quotation 1 Consulting Fixed Price Quotation 2 Consulting Fixed Price Order/ Contract Doc.09.

This takes place for the cProjects project elements with account assignments according to the dates. If you want a planning form to be assigned to the cost estimate at the point when you start the ad hoc costing function. You make this setting in Customizing for Collaboration Projects.SAP Online Help 12. Technically. by choosing Single-Object Controlling for Projects Settings for Easy Cost Planning. Collaboration Projects 177 . If a planning form is available for the cost estimate and additional entries are required in the form. and master cost center for the derivation of the activity type under which the allocation is reported) is derived from the HR organizational unit specified in the project definition. The Change <name of project>: Easy Cost Planning screen appears. You make this selection in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. For more information. the entry screen of the planning form appears on the right. The costs are calculated based on the rates for the resource. The revenues are calculated automatically if you have selected the option Use Cost/Revenue Rates from cProjects or Use Sales Pricing in SAP ERP as the revenue calculation type for the project type that you are using for the project. Then you can also call up sales pricing from within the ad hoc cost estimate. Enter the required data and choose Transfer. Activities You are on the Accounting tab page. see the Implementation Guide for Collaboration Projects under Single-Object Controlling for Projects Settings for Easy Cost Planning.2008 certain time period. Choose Ad Hoc Cost Estimate. You can archive the ad hoc cost estimate in SAP ECC (archiving object CO_ECP) if the project has the status [Seite 250] To Be Archived. see Sales Pricing for cProjects [Seite 178]. For more information. by choosing Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Make General Settings. You have entered the data that is relevant to costing (quantities and prices). For more information. have costed the simulation or project (Cost button) and saved it. Features The cost planning function is executed by Easy Cost Planning [Extern] (ECP). The assigned Controlling scenario contains a costing variant that you can use for ad hoc cost estimates for cProjects. You have authorization for accounting and administration. see Editing Costing Models and Assigning Attributes [Extern]. With the last option. the ad hoc cost estimate is saved in SAP ECC with reference to the cProjects project number. When the project is transferred. If you want to use a planning form. it is recosted and the cost estimate stored for the account assignment object. company code. that planning form must be assigned to the project type being used. For more information. The cost estimate is always created at project level and is always single-level. the revenues are calculated with the dynamic item processor [Extern] (DIP). see Costing Logic [Seite 164]. Prerequisites You are using a project type to which a Controlling scenario is assigned. project role.09. or task. The organizational data relevant to costing (controlling area. it must exist in the system.

when you call the project in cProjects again. Project simulations do not support accounting integration. This enables the system to use the data from Easy Cost Planning for sales pricing. You can add conditions (surcharges and discounts) and change individual prices. you do not have to choose Cost again. you have selected the revenue calculation type Use Sales Pricing in SAP ERP for the project type that you are using for the simulation or project.2008 The costing result is displayed on the left side of the screen.” Costing items that were manually added to an ad hoc cost estimate can never be transferred from one project to another (for example. Once you have saved the cost estimate in SAP ECC. You have entered this DIP profile in the item of the SD document (customer inquiry or quotation) for which you have created an object link in the simulation or operational project.09. For more information. Features The sales pricing function calculates the sales price: Collaboration Projects 178 . you can assign a planning form yourself. you need to choose Cost in cProjects again in order to import the new costing results. The Revenues from Sales Pricing indicator is selected in the header data of the ad hoc cost estimate under Valuation. Integration This function is accessed from an ad hoc cost estimate for a simulation or operational project (before transfer). You have defined a dynamic item processor profile [Extern] (DIP profile) with the source Easy Cost Planning in Customizing for the Project System under Revenues and Earnings Integration with SD Documents Creating Quotations and Project Billing Maintain Profiles for Quotations and Billing. The cost and revenue items can be seen in the item view at the lower right. with reconciliation [Seite 153] or when creating with a template).SAP Online Help 12. If you want to add additional items without a planning form. You can generate a quotation by transferring the items and prices. see Use of Easy Cost Planning [Extern] under “Item View Area” and “Activities. you can do this in the item view. or in addition to the items in the planning form. Exception: If. the system displays the changed costing results automatically. If you want to add additional costing items but no planning form has been assigned. Prerequisites In Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Make General Settings. Sales Pricing for cProjects Use This function calculates the sales price and displays the items [Extern] that flow into the price.

Under Extras Settings you can specify whether the controlling area currency. conversion only takes place after you have called up sales pricing again and saved it. or not at all. Choose Sales Pricing. If the material specified in the dynamic item processor profile carries a quantity. object currency. Conversion into the SD currency is based on the exchange rate of the price date from the SD document. You can control whether a planned value is used in pricing in full. or transaction currency is relevant for the individual items. the sales price basis view or the sales price view is displayed. It is not possible to save the sales pricing results in a document for cProjects.SAP Online Help 12. the system finds the items of the sales price basis using the DIP profile. and are displayed in cProjects.2008 Based on the quantity structure of the planning data from cProjects that was valuated with Easy Cost Planning (ECP) Based on the settings in the DIP profile Using the pricing functionality in the Sales and Distribution component (SD) Starting with the planned costs. plus the materials that were found by Easy Cost Planning. The system sorts the dynamic items based on the SD line items and determines the sales price with SD pricing [Extern]. If the currency of the customers changes. the planned values are organized based on the structure in the quotation. which is the customer view of pricing In this view.09. Activities You are in the ac hoc cost estimate. Collaboration Projects 179 . the system can only determine the quantity for the material from project planning if the quantities are convertible. See also the information on sales pricing available under Settings: Sales Pricing and Billing [Extern]. The items of the sales price basis are called dynamic items. your selected materials are displayed that the DIP derived from your entries. Changes that you make here are transferred into the quotation and Easy Cost Planning. If you have entered values in the fields Grouping or Search Field in cProjects. Additional data for pricing (such as the sold-to party) is located in the SD document. The system takes the currency for the individual items in the dynamic item processor from the SD document. Sales price view [Extern]. The system finds the costing sheet based on the document category (from the DIP profile). 8. which is the internal view of pricing This view displays the planned values by the items in the SD document. Do not make any changes here because they would not be transferred into the simulation or project. only at a certain percentage. Two views are available: Sales price basis view [Extern]. Depending on the settings.

This causes the costing and the planned costs to be updated. Once the transfer has taken place. Costing In the transfer. If an automatic method was used. For more information about costing. you cannot delete the transferred project elements. Features Two different controlling variants are available: In single-object controlling for internal orders [Seite 182] all costs and revenues for a project are collected in one or more internal orders.2008 Quotation. The project is transferred to SAP ECC for this.09. the project is transferred once in its entirety and costing is performed (again) (see below). The transfer type specified in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration Activate Integration dictates when the transfer will take place. The controlling method that was used determines which project elements are transferred. and resources. the project is transferred again when you save and costing is performed again. Collaboration Projects 180 . the system performs costing for the tasks and role assignments (for a taskbased method) or for roles and staffings (for a role-based method) and saves the costing in the account assignment object in SAP ECC. It can take place: Automatically when you save the project Once you have set the status Flagged for Transfer or To Assign and saved the project Once you have released the project and saved it In the first transfer. From a cost accounting point of view. tasks or roles.SAP Online Help 9. To do this. Each time a change is made to the project definition. see General Information About Accounting Integration [Seite 164]. Controlling Use The integration of Controlling allows you to monitor the costs and revenues in your project and to periodically activate the required capacity as work in process. If you are not in the sales price view. If you use an automatic controlling method. the account assignment objects are also updated if you made changes to the projects elements they are based on in cProjects or to the assignment. a PS project with WBS elements or an internal order is automatically created for your project in SAP ECC. In multilevel controlling [Seite 183] all costs and revenues for a project are collected in one or more WBS elements. the transfer is an activity allocation from the cProjects project (sender) to the account assignment object (recipient). choose Sales Price. The sales price view is displayed. You can make changes and create a quotation. If you use a manual controlling method. choose 12. you have to assign the internal orders or WBS elements yourself.

For more information. you should correct these errors at a later point in time.09. You release a project in cProjects. Once you have corrected the errors you can recreate or update from within the cockpit. You assign a responsible organizational unit to a project.2008 You can call the controlling cockpit [Seite 181] in SAP ECC. Controlling Cockpit Use The controlling cockpit gives you an overview of all messages that are issued when you transfer your projects to Controlling or carry out costing. you can flag the message as completed directly in the cockpit and delete it later. Here you can find error messages that affect the transfer to Controlling. Features The controlling cockpit contains two types of error messages: Serious errors that prevent you from creating or updating the account assignment object or carrying out costing. Once you have assigned a cost center to the responsible organizational unit. The project is transferred to SAP ECC. but the internal order in Controlling is locked and therefore it cannot be released automatically. Activities You can call the controlling cockpit from within cProjects or in SAP ECC using transaction COCPCPR. Collaboration Projects 181 . However. and then resetting the lock. Once you have corrected the reason for the message. releasing it. When you create the internal order. see Controlling Cockpit Documentation. you can recreate the internal order within the controlling cockpit. Therefore. You can fix the problem by unlocking the internal order. no cost center has been assigned to the unit.SAP Online Help 12. the system cannot create the internal order. the system tries to determine a cost center for the responsible organizational unit. Less serious errors that do not prevent you from creating or updating internal orders. Nevertheless.

If you want to use more than one internal order. Integration Once the data has been transferred to Controlling. Therefore. You can start costing directly from cProjects to monitor costs. follow the same procedure as for WBS elements. you have to create and assign them manually.09. One of the following controlling methods is assigned to the project type of the current project in Customizing for SAP ECC under Define Controlling Scenario: Internal Order (Project Definition. the following only describes automatic account assignment (controlling method Internal Order (Project Definition. Automatic)). see the “Features” section of Project Versions [Seite 148]. Manual) Internal Order (Project Role. Collaboration Projects 182 . Costing takes place in Controlling and the results are displayed in cProjects. Manual) You have the following authorizations: Accounting and administrative authorizations for displaying accounting information and carrying out costing Authorization in the Controlling system for carrying out internal order transactions Authorization for creating and changing the cost collector (for RFC users) Features The internal order can be created and assigned manually or automatically. It displays the account assignment object for all planned and actual postings in the project. you can use all standard business processes that are available for internal orders.SAP Online Help 12. In this case. Integrated planning together with an ECP costing is not supported. Automatic) Internal Order (Structure Element. depending on the controlling method you choose. for example. The cost collector is an internal order. You use this function to post all costs and revenues for a project to a cost collector. programs for period-end closing. Easy Cost Planning (ECP) is only supported in the Controlling version 0. Prerequisites Your system administrator activated accounting integration for the project type of the current project (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Define Project Types). as described under Manual Creation of the Controlling Structure [Seite 185].2008 Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders Use For more information about the special features of simulations and snapshots. You can also use multiple internal orders.

In order to do this. You can create this structure independently of the project structure in cProjects or you can create a structure that is partly or completely identical. There is only one internal order per project.2008 Data Transfer The first time a project is transferred to Controlling. Multilevel Controlling Use This function enables you to manage all costs and revenues for a project using a work breakdown structure in the Project System (PS).SAP Online Help 12. you assign project roles or tasks. No account assignment objects are assigned to the individual project elements. The following graphic explains the function (assignment of tasks): Collaboration Projects 183 . you can assign a single WBS element to each project element for which costs and revenues are incurred or summarize the costs and revenues of several project elements in one WBS element.09. you create a multilevel controlling structure out of WBS elements that serve as cost collectors. The following project definition characteristics are transferred to Controlling: Project number Description in the original language Project type Project reason Search field Group Responsible organization Template number Priority System status The system does not transfer user statuses. These characteristics are stored for the internal order and are used to find the internal orders for your projects. This allows you to control how costs incurred by work or other required capacities are posted to project elements. You decide which tasks or project roles you link to which WBS elements. the system automatically creates an internal order. When the system creates the internal order it simultaneously creates the settlement rule. For example. Depending on the settings you made for the project type in Customizing. You can do this manually or automatically.

The search help for PS projects will then also be available. If you create complex multilevel controlling structures manually. When you assign an account assignment element to a cProjects project element. However. Collaboration Projects 184 . The controlling method specifies the following: Whether the controlling structure is to be created manually or automatically Whether account assignment is to be carried out for project roles or for project elements (tasks and project definition) Make sure that the controlling method does not contradict the settings you make under Confirmation in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Prerequisites You set up a controlling method for multilevel controlling and the permitted controlling level in Customizing for SAP ECC under Integration with Other SAP Components Collaboration Projects Controlling Define Controlling Scenario for the project type that is used. You can only assign the project elements of a project to the WBS elements of a single PS project.2008 Integration You can use SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (BI) to evaluate cProjects projects or you can use the evaluations in cProjects to do this. the system transfers this assignment for all lower-level elements down to the level at which an assignment already exists. you can assign different WBS elements of a PS project to different cProjects projects.SAP Online Help 12. An account assignment element can be assigned to several cProjects project elements of the same project but not to the project elements of different cProjects projects. SAP recommends that you only use the evaluations in BI. You can overwrite the default information. you first have to delete the assignment and then save the project.09. If you change an assignment. If you want to change this assignment. the assignments that were automatically transferred are also changed – assignments adjusted manually are not changed automatically. Features You can assign a cProjects project element to a single account assignment element.

the system displays both project structures. Manual) Multilevel Controlling (Project Role. therefore they do not inherit the account assignment objects of higher-level project elements either. If the BAdI has been implemented. If you have not already made an assignment to a PS project or internal order. the Determine Default Assignment pushbutton is active. Manual) The project has the status To Assign. Manual) from Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182]. The description of this function also applies to the manual assignment of internal orders for the controlling methods Internal Order (Structure Element. the system displays the search help which you can use to find the PS project you require. Integration You can create enhancements for manual multilevel controlling using the Business Add-In (BAdI) DPR_FIN_GECCO_MANUAL. Collaboration Projects 185 . For more information about creating a work breakdown structure.2008 Subprojects have their own assignments to account assignment objects. You then assign the work breakdown structure elements (WBS elements) to the cProjects project elements as account assignment objects. Prerequisites The project has a project type to which one of the following controlling methods has been assigned in Customizing for SAP ECC under Controlling Define Controlling Scenario: Multilevel Controlling (Structure Element. Features Accounting Tab Page You assign the project elements to WBS elements on the Accounting tab page in the Account Assignment view. If the cProjects project is already assigned to a PS project. Manual) and Internal Order (Project Role.SAP Online Help 12.09. Activities Manual Creation of the Controlling Structure [Seite 185] Automatic Creation of the Controlling Structure [Seite 187] See also: Accounting Integration [Seite 162] Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182] Manual Creation of the Controlling Structure Use You use this function to manually assign an existing project in the Project System (PS project) to a cProjects project. see Editing the Work Breakdown Structure [Extern].

1. you can also select a phase and assign this too. Select the cProjects project element and the WBS element you want to assign and then choose Assign. When you do this. The system checks whether the assignment is valid and enters the WBS element as the account assignment element..2008 A manual assignment is only possible if the status To Assign is set for the project definition.SAP Online Help Assigning Account Assignment Elements 12. Assigning Internal Orders As Account Assignment Objects . You can change the automatic assignments. Assigning WBS Elements As Account Assignment Objects 1. The system checks whether the assignment is valid and enters the internal order as the account assignment element.. all subtasks of a task that you assign are also automatically assigned. you can no longer delete the project element. By clicking an account assignment element. You cannot enter the PS projects yourself. all tasks that belong to this phase are assigned to the account assignment element that is assigned to the phase. Depending on the settings you made in Customizing. You cannot assign account assignment elements to checklists or checklist items. you have to select them from the search help. Internal orders that have already been used in other cProjects projects no longer appear in the search help. Account Assignment Once you have defined the account assignment objects. See also: Automatic Creation of the Controlling Structure [Seite 187] Multilevel Controlling [Seite 183] Collaboration Projects 186 . 2. it has already been assigned to a project element of a different cProjects project. In the same way. the account assignment element is grayed out. If an assignment already exists and you assign a new account assignment element. you assign tasks or project roles. for example. 2. Select the cProjects project element and find an internal order using the search help. Choose Assign. you can display details of the element or you can edit the element using one of the services offered. Activities . data can be transferred to SAP ECC. If you cannot assign an account assignment element because. Once the data of a project element has been transferred to SAP ECC. Assign a PS project to the cProjects project.09. If you assign tasks. Working with Existing Assignments You can change the assignments provided that you have not released the project or provided that the status of the project element permits this. the old assignment is overwritten.

The required capacity is determined by costing. The system creates WBS elements for the project elements phase and task up to the level specified in the controlling level parameter in Customizing. Phase In cProjects. The relationship between two phases is a left-to-right relationship. The system uses the project element numbers as the name of the WBS elements. the system proposes the internal ID for the external ID on the Structure Basic Data tab page in the Number Initial field. apart from those that were created from phases. The system creates a work breakdown structure element (WBS element [Extern]) for each cProjects project element (apart from checklists and checklist items) and assigns the elements to one another.SAP Online Help 12. No information relevant to project management. The structure of the PS project matches the structure of the cProjects project. Collaboration Projects 187 .09. the internal ID is no longer visible on the cProjects interface.2008 Automatic Creation of the Controlling Structure Use You use this function to automatically create a project in the Project System (PS project) from a project in cProjects. All WBS elements are relevant to account assignment. The system uses this external project ID as the name of the PS project definition. The relationship between a phase and the task below it is also a predecessor-successor relationship. If you have changed the external ID. Features Creating Account Assignment Elements The system creates the controlling structure automatically once the project data has been transferred to the Project System. such as dates. The relationship between a project definition and a phase is a predecessorsuccessor relationship in this function. duration. or required capacity is transferred to the WBS elements. The relationship between the predecessor and the successor in the hierarchy of the project elements remains during the transfer from cProjects to the PS project. The system creates a PS project definition and the top WBS element for the project definition in cProjects. Therefore. You can only use any external project ID once in cProjects. Rules for Assigning Names Task-based controlling Project definition In cProjects. the system displays the external project ID on the Structure Basic Data tab page in the Number field. the top WBS element does not have a project element number from cProjects assigned to it. The order of the project elements from left to right is not kept during the transfer.

Once the transfer to the Project System has taken place. you can display details about the element or you can edit the element using one of the services offered. see SAP Note 923205. You use the pushbutton Switch to Manual Assignment before the project is released to switch to manual mode for making changes to the assignments. The internal ID is a unique key for all projects. See also: Manual Creation of the Controlling Structure [Seite 185] Multilevel Controlling [Seite 183] Collaboration Projects 188 . Role In cProjects. For more information. the system displays the external project ID on the Structure Basic Data tab page in the Number field. We recommend that you use a unique name for all projects and that when naming PS projects. The same conditions apply to this project as to a project you created with a project type to which a manual controlling method has been assigned. the status is automatically changed to To Assign. Working with Existing Assignments If you add project elements once the structure has been transferred. You can use a name of a PS project or WBS element only once.09. the system also creates account assignment elements for these project elements. the system displays the project role ID on the Resources General tab page. the system displays the external ID of the task on the Structure Basic Data tab page in the Number field. The system uses this external project ID as the name of the PS project definition. you make sure that the rules for the project definition do not conflict with the derived names. Role-based controlling Project definition In cProjects. However. You can only use any external project ID once in cProjects. note that you cannot switch back to an automatic controlling method. The system uses this ID as the name of the WBS element.2008 The system uses the internal ID of the phase as the name of the WBS element. it is no longer possible to change the project element number in cProjects. The account assignment manager does not support the deletion of PS projects or WBS elements. If this project had the status Flagged for Transfer. Task In cProjects.SAP Online Help 12. By clicking a WBS element.

Prerequisites You are using accounting integration [Seite 162]. You can only request external resources for project roles but you can create material requests for all project elements and project roles.SAP Online Help 12. You can display shopping carts that exist in SRM from the shopping cart overview. If you request an external resource for a project role. The system transfers the dates for the resource assignment from the shopping cart. for example. follow the link in the Shopping Cart column. see SAP Library under Supplier Relationship Management Service Procurement and Self-Service Procurement. If resources in the project role cannot be edited in parallel. You activated the Shopping in SRM function in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Structure Define Project Types. purchasing. SRM contains all the functions you need for the shopping cart that was created. To do this. You cannot change or delete this manually. You can only delete this resource assignment by canceling the shopping cart to which it belongs. For more information. approval. It also creates a corresponding resource assignment on the Staffing tab page. see SAP Note 960237. CATS/SRM/FIN function in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Structure Define Project Types. Features To carry out an external order. For more information about the system settings required for using SRM integration. The system posts the recorded time to cProjects according to the settings that were made for time recording using the cross-application time sheet [Seite 90]. the dates may conflict with one another.09. The SRM application opens in a separate window. the system automatically transfers the qualifications of the project role to the description of the shopping cart. You activated the Time/Travel Expenses Rec. for recording time for external resources. You have a user in SRM. and creating invoices. This function is available for project elements and project roles on the Shopping Cart tab page. You performed the Specify Source System for SRM Categories activity in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Connection to External Systems SRM Integration.2008 Integration with Supplier Relationship Management Use You use this function to order external materials and resources directly from cProjects through Supplier Relationship Management (SRM). you create a shopping cart in SRM. Collaboration Projects 189 . Account assignment objects can be internal orders or WBS elements (see Single-Object Controlling for Internal Orders [Seite 182] and Multilevel Controlling [Seite 183]). Integration The system posts the costs to the relevant account assignment object of the project element.

You can only cancel it if the shopping cart or parts of the shopping cart have not been delivered yet. 7. Enter a description of the shopping cart. 4. The shopping cart has the status In Preparation if no shopping cart has been created for it in SRM. 10. Enter the required quantity. Enter a delivery date. 6. This is also indicated in the Delivered column. Once the shopping cart has been delivered. Choose Create Shopping Cart. Enter a category. Prerequisites You can only create a shopping cart for the project elements of projects that have been released. Choose Projects Resources Shopping Cart Create Shopping Cart. If you do this. Enter a unit. Procedure Project Element: Order Material 3.09. the shopping cart in cProjects has the status In Process.SAP Online Help 12. Choose Projects Structure Shopping Cart Create Shopping Cart. 2. 1. the status in the Shopping Cart column changes to Canceled. 3. You can also cancel the shopping cart created in cProjects. Collaboration Projects 190 . Choose whether you want to order an external resource or a material. Enter data in the Internal Information field. the system automatically sets the status to Delivery Completed. Enter a description of the shopping cart. You can only select ISO units. as required. You can staff a task with an external resource [Seite 191]. Once a shopping cart exists in SRM too. 5. Project Role: Order External Resource or Material . 8. you create a shopping cart via the Collaboration Projects user interface. 9. as required. Activities You can create [Seite 190] or cancel [Seite 191] a shopping cart.. 4. Enter data in the Internal Information field. Creating a Shopping Cart Use To order a material or an external resource in Supplier Relationship Management (SRM).2008 The Shopping Cart column shows the current status of the shopping cart.

Staffing Tasks with External Resources Use You can use a shopping cart to order an external resource from Collaboration Projects (cProjects) for a project role. enter a delivery date. for example. enter the start date in the From Date field and the finish date in the To Date field. the system can also cancel the shopping cart there. If you are using a material. 1. Choose Create Shopping Cart. Depending on how advanced the processing of the shopping cart is in SRM. You can schedule the external resource straight away as a resource with edit authorization or as part of the project role with edit authorization for a task.. Enter a unit. 5. Enter the required quantity. Enter a category. You cannot set the status of a shopping cart that has already been canceled back to In Process. Canceling a Shopping Cart Use You can cancel a shopping cart that was created in Collaboration Projects (cProjects) provided that it does not have the status Delivery Completed. the person responsible in SRM must contact you. If you are using an external resource. 8. You can adjust this proposal before you create the shopping cart. If a direct cancellation is no longer possible in SRM. Choose Cancel Shopping Cart.SAP Online Help 12. Choose the Shopping Cart tab page. 9. Select a shopping cart from the shopping cart overview. Procedure .09. The system only actually cancels the shopping cart when you save the project. 7. the system copies the qualifications of the project role (Qualifications tab page) as qualification requirements to the Internal Information field. Collaboration Projects 191 . whether it has been ordered or delivered.2008 For an external resource. 6. You can only select ISO units or ISO time units for materials and external resources. 3. 2.

if required (see Creating a Template [Seite 36]).SAP Online Help 12. Procedure For more information. see Assignment of Project Roles to Tasks [Seite 106]. Use You can carry out the following functions: Creating and opening a control plan [Seite 192] Editing a control plan [Seite 193] Creating a control plan version [Seite 196] Creating objects in the control plan [Seite 196] Creating and Opening a Control Plan Prerequisites To create a control plan.2008 Constraints You cannot use the external resource as a responsible resource or as part of the responsible role. Collaboration Projects 192 . You created a control plan template.. you are in the Control Plans initial view. If you cancel the shopping cart for an external resource. The function and existing descriptions are oriented towards QS-9000. You cannot select the external resource as the decision maker for approving a phase. you are in the Control Plans initial view or in a project on the Control Plans tab page. Procedure Creating a Control Plan . updating it continuously.09. You cannot use an external resource for roles with distribution. To open a control plan. Select the project for which you want to create a control plan. Control Plan Definition Description of which measures and methods you use in a specific phase of the creation of a product to check whether you have adhered to predefined quality characteristics. the system automatically deletes the corresponding resource assignment in the project role and the references of the external resource to the assigned tasks (resources with authorization to carry out tasks). You use a control plan throughout the entire product life cycle. 1.

Prerequisites You created a control plan and opened it to edit data (see Creating and Opening a Control Plan [Seite 192]). 1999): Field Meaning Collaboration Projects 193 . Procedure Entering Header Data .SAP Online Help 12. 1. 5. Choose Create. 2. You can only use templates with the status Released..2008 Only those projects are displayed whose project type allows the use of control plans. Edit the control plan (see Editing a Control Plan [Seite 193]). Enter a number for the new control plan. Editing a Control Plan Use A control plan [Seite 192] consists of many parts: A control plan header that contains general control plan data Process steps for structuring the process Tools for each process step Characteristics to be checked for each process step You can create object links [Seite 158] for each control plan on the appropriate tab page. The system checks whether the number has been assigned yet.09. Save your entries. The following table is an overview of the fields and their meanings (according to QS9000. Select a template if required. 4. 6. 3. click the control plan number in the control plan overview for a project. Opening a Control Plan To open an existing control plan. Note that you can only edit a control plan if you opened it in the Control Plans initial view. Fill out the control plan header fields.

Creating a Process Step . 2.SAP Online Help 12. Date on which the responsible quality department of the customer released the control plan Enter data here only if a release is required. You can unlock the control plan later on. choose Complete. If you want to protect the control plan from changes.. Choose the Items tab page. The system changes the status to Released. Name of the vendor and business area. Once you have completed the project or the control plan. Collaboration Projects 194 . Name and description of the product to be checked Date on which the responsible production location of the customer released the control plan Enter data here only if a release is required. Contact/Telephone Date of First Release Part Number/Last Change Status Name and telephone number of the contact person responsible for the control plan Date on which the control plan was released for the first time Number of the system to be checked. Once you have entered all your data. or single parts. You cannot make any more changes or create new versions. Part Name/Description Vendor/Location/Release/Date Date/Release by Customer QM Vendor Location Vendor Key Date of Further Release (Optional) 2.09. the subgroup. In the dropdown box in the top left area of the screen. The system creates the entry in the Items area and assigns a process number automatically. choose Process Step and then choose Create. the assembly. This completes the control plan. if required Core Team Date/Release by Customer Dev. choose Lock from the Change Status dropdown box. Your system administrator must first assign the category names. You can change the process number. 1. release the control plan by choosing Release from the Change Status dropdown box. location. as well as the status of the last change made Name of the team responsible for the most recent valid control plan Date on which the responsible development department of the customer released the control plan Enter data here only if a release is required. or department that is responsible for carrying out the control plan Vendor identification key Date of further releases.2008 Category Category of the product to be checked. A category enables you to create a link between a phase and a control plan when you choose the same description for the category as for the phase.

If you want to change the setting. Creating Characteristics . choose Char. for example.Char. automatically assigns a sequence number to the tool (ToolSeqNo. If. If you are using master inspection characteristics from the QM system. Select a product or a process characteristic.. and the system group. 6. The system creates an entry below the selected tool with the same process number and sequence number (ToolSeqNo. In the Additional Data/Results area. 12. 4. and prepares the required fields for input.2008 The area is only ready for input if you have created a process step and if the control plan is released. Enter a process description in the Additional Data/Results area. The system creates an entry below the selected process step with the same process number as the process step. 7. 5.SAP Online Help 3.ID). enter the tool.09. Creating Tools .). choose Tool(s) and then choose Create. and prepares the required fields for input. 2. 4. or material you use to check characteristics. the system deactivates the Product Characteristic input field. 4. You can change the sequence number. 3. Enter the results in the Additional Data/Results area. Enter the following additional data in the Additional Data/Results area: Control method Procedure used to monitor a step Response plan Specifies which measures should be taken to prevent the production of products with errors 8. you specified a process characteristic. device. 1. the category of the characteristic (Class. 1. 3. 9. You can specify only one of the two characteristics but you must specify one. Enter a unique characteristic identification (Char. Select the process step for which you want to create a tool. Select a process name. In the dropdown box in the top left area of the screen. In the dropdown box in the top left area of the screen. See also: Creating a Control Plan Version [Seite 196] Collaboration Projects 195 . Select the tool for which you want to create a characteristic 2. enter the plant of the master inspection characteristic.) as the tool. Choose the tool set you require under Tool Set.). and then choose Create. Save your entries.. you first have to delete the value in the Process Characteristic input field so that the system activates the field for the product characteristic.

b. 1. Prerequisites You opened a control plan in the Control Plans initial view.SAP Online Help 12. You can open all versions from the Control Plans tab page. Choose one of the following options: a. the corresponding pushbuttons are not active. You can only create a new control plan version for released control plans. Procedure . . routings only. Collaboration Projects 196 . If this is not done.. Creating Objects in the Control Plan Use You can generate inspection plans and routings in an SAP system from the control plan. If you want to generate them a second time. or both are created How many plans are generated per control plan Whether an object link should be generated automatically for the new plan on creation You can generate inspection plans and routings only once for a control plan.2008 Creating Objects in the Control Plan [Seite 196] Creating a Control Plan Version Use You can create different versions of a control plan. All entries you previously made are deleted in the new version. Note that you can no longer change the old version once you have created the new version. Create version The system creates an empty version of the current control plan. Create version with template The system creates a new version of the current control plan and copies all entries you previously made. 2. Complete the new control plan version (see Editing a Control Plan [Seite 193]). you must first create a new control plan version [Seite 196]. You system administrator specifies: Whether inspection plans only. Save your entries. Prerequisites Your system administrator activated the generation function in Customizing for Collaboration Projects: See the BAdI: Object Creation in Control Plan activity.09.. Only the latest version is ready for input. 3.

Set a filter. You want to exchange your documents between DMS and cProjects. The relevant functions can be found in the SAP menu under Logistics Quality Management Quality Planning Inspection Planning Inspection Plan and Routing. 3.SAP Online Help 12. You want to map your project structure via the DMS document structure. We recommend that you manage your documents with DMS in the following cases: You are already using DMS and require access to the existing DMS documents. You opened a control plan in the Control Plans initial view. "project" is synonymous with "initiative" in the following sections. Call the SAP system to call the inspection plans or routings and edit them. See also: Documents [Seite 198] Integration with SAP Document Management [Seite 203] Collaboration Projects 197 .2008 You can only generate objects for control plans that have been released. 2. Procedure 1. we recommend that you use the document management function in cProjects. Choose Generate Objects. You receive a success message once the system has created the object in the SAP system. You want to classify your documents. If you are working with initiatives. Work with Documents Use You can manage your documents in cProjects using both the cProjects document management function and document management (SAP DMS). The filter determines which data from the control plan is transferred.09. This also gives you the option of managing your documents in Microsoft® Windows File Explorer. In all other cases.

You can use templates to create documents. for example.09. Procedure Creating a Folder . If folders already exist.. The system displays the project element as the top node in the Document Folder column. You can structure the documents in document folders. for example. You are in the detail view of a project element on the Documents tab page. graphics. You can protect each document and folder from unauthorized access using authorizations [Seite 242]. You can assign documents to each project element. document description. as files. Collaboration Projects 198 . Prerequisites You created the documents that you want to assign to a project element. to get a better overview. navigate to the project element for which you want to create a folder. navigate to the place where you wish to insert the new folder.2008 Documents Information carriers that describe objects such as technical drawings.SAP Online Help 12. In the structure tree. 1. or text documents. file name. or document status File data. or file size More Information Assigning Documents and Creating Folders Editing the Document or Folder Using Document Templates Content Versions Tabular Document View Integration with a WebDAV Client Assigning Documents and Creating Folders Use You can check in the documents that you assign to a project element to document folders. document name. Structure A document consists of the following elements: Document data. file type. 2. programs.

The system creates your new folder. You can edit the document [Seite 199] and assign authorizations [Seite 245]. 2. The system switches to the detailed information for the document and copies the document name to the document data. You can then edit [Seite 199] the new folder. In the New Folder area. Save your entries.SAP Online Help 3. 4.2008 Note that the following characters should not be used in the name: üäöÜÄÖß?!"§/()={}[]\*<> 5. enter the file path in the URL field and then choose Check In As URL. if necessary. Result The system checks in the document as a new content version [Seite 202]. Save your entries. 4. Editing the Document or Folder Use You can edit documents as follows: Change document and folder data Delete Copy and paste Cut and paste Download documents Collaboration Projects 199 . .09. 3. Assigning a Document 1. In the structure tree. Choose Continue. enter a different folder name. 8. Choose New Folder. navigate to the project element to which you want to assign a document. Change the document name. enter the file path in the File field and then choose Check In. Enter a Description and assign a Status. if required. Note that the following characters should not be used in the name: üäöÜÄÖß?!"§/()={}[]\*<> 7. In the Document Folder column. 6. 5.. Choose New Document. navigate to the place where you want to assign a document. 12. If you want to create a link to the document. If you want to check in the document to the system.

In the Document Folder column. The system moves the document. navigate to the place where you want to insert the folder or document.. Procedure Changing Document and Folder Data . Confirm that you want to delete the object. In the Document Folder column. navigate to a document or folder. 4.. 1. Cutting and Pasting a Document or Folder . the system also deletes all subdocuments and subfolders. 3. Choose Paste. Choose Paste. 4. 2. Copying and Pasting a Document or Folder . Save your entries. 5. Save your entries. 2. Change the data. In the Document Folder column. 1. Collaboration Projects 200 .. 2. . 1. Downloading Documents to Your PC You can download a document to your local PC and lock it to prevent other users from making changes to it. navigate to a document or folder. navigate to the place where you want to insert the folder or document. 3. In the Document Folder column.. In the Document Folder column. .09. navigate to a document or folder. You are editing a project element and are on the Documents tab page. 1. 3..2008 Upload documents Display and change linked files Prerequisites You assigned documents and created folders [Seite 198] for a project element. Choose Delete. Choose Cut. 5. In the Document Folder column.SAP Online Help 12. navigate to a document or folder. Save your entries. The system creates a copy of the document there. 3. Deleting a Document or Folder Note that when you delete a folder. 4. 2. Save your entries. Choose Copy.

3. or select Overwrite Current Version. Deselect the indicator Document cannot be changed by other users so that other users can make changes to the document or check the document out. 4. If you want to check this document in again later on. Displaying and Changing Linked Files . 7. or choose Check In As URL to create a link to the document. 2. navigate to a document. other users can overwrite your changes.SAP Online Help 1. Choose Browse and select the file that you want to check in. if required. If you do not select this indicator. Using Document Templates Prerequisites In the Templates initial view.09. 12. if required. and enter the Status. In the Document Folder column.. Select the indicator Document cannot be changed by other users to lock the document so that other users cannot make changes to the file data. You are in the editing view of a project element and you are on the Documents tab page. 1.. Enter a Description. The system switches to the detailed information for the document and copies the document name to the document data. Save the document to your hard drive by clicking the secondary mouse button on the file name and selecting the appropriate function from the context menu. Uploading Documents from Your PC . Choose Check In to check the document in to the system. you must remember where you saved it. 2. The system opens the file for editing. navigate to a document. 6. In the File Data area. Make changes.2008 2. If you want to check this file in again later on. click the file name. you created and released document templates (see Creating a Template [Seite 36]). 8. Collaboration Projects 201 . In the Document Folder column. In the Document Folder column. Save your entries. navigate to a document. 5. 3. Choose Create Version. Select Create New Version to create a new content version [Seite 202]. 1. and save the file to your hard drive. 3. you must remember where you saved it.

Collaboration Projects 202 . Tabular Document View Use The tabular document view offers you a quick overview of all folders and documents assigned to a project element. In the Document Folder area. you can create new content versions of this document. Features You can view all the versions of your document that you have already created. position your cursor on the document that you want to use as a template or on the folder with the documents that you want to use as templates..SAP Online Help 12. In the Doc. 6. you can see your document folder and in the right screen area. Templates area. position your cursor on the folder to which you want to copy the template or the folder with the templates. You can display the individual versions by clicking the file name. choose Copy. 4. To copy the template or the folder with the templates to this folder. column. Content Versions Use When you upload a document from your local PC to cProjects or check in a document you have already checked in again. 3. 1. In the left screen area. Choose Templates. To create a link from the folder to the template. 2. The system marks the current version of the document in the Act. choose Create Link.09. Features You can branch to the document using by choosing the file name link. Prerequisites You opened a project element for editing and are on the Documents tab page under Content Versions.2008 Procedure . Save your entries. you can see the document templates. 5.

you can include a document structure in the folder of an SAP DMS project status report and send it together with the report. You can group the document structures for the individual project elements together to form an entire document structure that reflects the project structure.SAP Online Help 12. You can open the application by clicking the document number from the document structure display or the link overview.2008 Integration with SAP Document Management Use You can manage your documents using document management (SAP DMS) and exchange documents between DMS and cProjects.09. Then click the file name to display the document or download it to your PC. Prerequisites Your system administrator has permitted the use of SAP document management for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types). You create an entire document structure for a project status report for a program and insert all project status reports of the assigned projects in the structure. Features You can link project elements to existing document info records via an SAP DMS object link. Furthermore. We recommend that you install SAP Easy Document Management 3. You can insert documents from an existing collaboration in the document structure of a DMS folder that is linked to a project element. Then use the Entire Document Structure function to insert a document structure in document structures that are linked to superior project elements.00 or a higher release on your PC. Document management (SAP DMS) corresponds to the SAP application component CA-DMS. you will see all the document structures of lower-level project elements. Integration You can create collaborations [Extern] straight from the documents in SAP DMS or add documents to existing collaborations. If you display the document structure of a document info record that is linked to a superior project element. It is part of SAP PLM and SAP ERP. You can exchange documents between cProjects and SAP DMS. See also: Working with Document Info Records [Seite 204] Collaboration Projects 203 . You can create new document info records (with or without templates) and link them to project elements simultaneously.

Depending on the settings made by your system administrator. If you create a link to an existing document info record. If you leave the project after creating the link without saving. Once you reach the overview again. the info record with the link will not exist in SAP DMS. Enter the new name and choose Continue. the link will not be saved. Enter the required data and then choose Continue on each screen. If you leave the project without saving after you have created a link. Choose Create.. 2. Choose Delete. Note the following when you create a link to a new document info record: The new info record with the link is only saved when you save the project. You can only create new links from here. note that the link is only saved when you save the project. The system deletes the link. Note that the document info record still exists in DMS. The system guides you through the creation process. choose Close Document Structure to go to the overview.. 1. Select a document link. If this is the case. the system displays the document structure straight away when you open the tab page. Changing the Name of a Linked Document Info Record . 2.. Choose Change.SAP Online Help 12. 3. 1. Select a document link. Collaboration Projects 204 . save your project. the system either displays the info record ID as soon as you have saved or only after you have chosen Refresh.09. Deleting a Document Link . You are on the level of the required project element on the SAP DMS tab page in the document info records overview. If a single document info record is linked to this project element. Procedure Creating a Document Link 1. the system displays the document structure as soon as you have selected the document info record and does not automatically return to the overview. 2. 3. If the first link you create is a link to an existing document info record.2008 Working with Document Info Records Prerequisites .

choose whether you want to transfer project status reports or documents to the project element you currently in. 1. Choose Entire Document Structure. 4. Otherwise. Save the project. 2. 3. Select a document link. Choose Display Document Structure.. The system proposes all superior project elements and the document structures that belong to them. To display the original of a document info record from the document structure. click on the document number. If you are in a project definition for which you have already created a project status report in SAP DMS.09. 3. The system inserts the document info record in the document structure or deletes it from the document structure. it might be necessary to choose Read SAP DMS document structure again. If necessary. 5. To open the document info record for editing from the document structure in SAP DMS. If you display the superior document structure. click on the identification. 4.. Choose Threshold Values. .SAP Online Help 12. To display the data of the document info record. Transferring Documents Between cProjects and SAP DMS.2008 Displaying or Editing a Document Info Record . Select a document link. click Open in the Application column. 1. 1. For more information.. Transfer the required documents. see Transferring Documents [Seite 221].. Collaboration Projects 205 . 2. The system displays the threshold value violations for this document link. the document structure of this status report is the superior document structure. Displaying Threshold Value Violations for a Document Info Record . 1. Including a Document Info Record in a Document Structure or Deleting it . Displaying the Document Structure of a Document Info Record . This query appears in the project definition only and then only if you store your status reports in cProjects. Choose Transfer Documents. Select a document link. Select a document structure and choose Continue. click on the file name (if it exists). Select a document link. 2. the system displays the overview of the cProjects documents of the project element. 2. Choose whether you want to insert the document info record in the document structure of a superior project element or delete it from the document structure. 3. To open the document info record in SAP DMS for editing. 4.. You can set a manual severity here. 1. 2.

SAP NetWeaver portal drive This WebDAV application connects Microsoft Windows File Explorer to a configured cProjects or cFolders repository. The integration with Microsoft Windows File Explorer provides users with a user interface comparable to the user interface of a file server.2008 See also: Integration with SAP Document Management [Seite 203] Integration with a WebDAV Client Purpose The WebDAV interface (Web-Based Distributed Authoring and Versioning) enables a connection to be set up between cProjects or cFolders and SAP Knowledge Management in the SAP NetWeaver Portal. The connection to SAP Knowledge Management in the SAP NetWeaver Portal allows cProjects or cFolders documents to be used as a data source in the portal. It also allows integration with Microsoft Windows File Explorer. the cross-repository search function).SAP Online Help 3. To close the area. You can then process this data using functions provided by SAP Knowledge Management (for example. folders and documents). see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under Getting Started – Using SAP Software Working with Tools and Features Working with Folders Working with Folders in Windows (Portal Drive) Personalizing the Portal Drive Connect. see Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209]. Your system administrator for the cProjects or cFolders system defines the WebDAV access in Customizing for cFolders or cProjects. For more information about the portal drive connection. using an external WebDAV-compatible application.09. You install the portal drive on your PC. This connection enables project members from a cProjects or cFolders project to edit the project and collaboration hierarchy structures contained in a cProjects or cFolders repository. Employees can then navigate in a familiar working environment within the nested structure elements and evaluate and edit the resources that exist there (for example. Integration WebDAV Applications The standard system supports two WebDAV applications: WebDAV repository manager in SAP Knowledge Management (application component EP-KM) You install a SAP NetWeaver portal with SAP Knowledge Management (KM) and configure a WebDAV repository manager for the cProjects or cFolders repository in Content Management in KM. Your system administrator for the cProjects or cFolders system defines the WebDAV access in Customizing for cFolders or cProjects. For more information about the necessary configuration steps. 12. Collaboration Projects 206 . choose Hide.

or delete data via the external WebDAV application. Authorizations A WebDAV application must authenticate itself each time it sends a request to the cProjects or cFolders system. If the user wants to create. irrespective of the user-specific language setting in the cProjects or cFolders system. The user must enter his or her user name and password for the system. Otherwise. change. Languagedependent texts are output in the language of the current session in the cProjects or cFolders system. the WebDAV interface cannot transfer the data correctly. If the WebDAV request comes from the portal drive. phase. see Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209]. The authorizations for the user are checked in the cProjects or cFolders system: The user only has access to cProjects or cFolders data via the WebDAV interface for which he or she has read authorization.09. Entry Objects Collaboration Projects 207 . If the WebDAV request is issued by KM in the portal. You make the language setting by choosing System User Profile Own Data. A user who has read authorization for a project element in cProjects should also have read authorization for all the subfolders and subdocuments of this project element. this session uses the language that is set up for the user in the portal. task Folder Document The system only displays documents that are also displayed on the Documents tab page in the standard system. Features Evaluating the Hierarchy Structures The following overview contains the elements of the hierarchy structures from cProjects or cFolders that you can access via the WebDAV interface. the user-specific language setting in the cProjects or cFolders system determines the language of the session.2008 Language A WebDAV application creates a session in the cProjects or cFolders system. checklist item. Only those users who can log on directly to the cProjects or cFolders system have access to the cProjects or cFolders repository via the WebDAV interface. checklist.SAP Online Help 12. Collaboration structure from cFolders Collaboration. work area Root folder. he or she requires special authorization in the cProjects or cFolders system. folder Document You have the option of connecting a WebDAV-compatible application to an entry object in such a way that only the hierarchy is visible below the entry object. Structure Elements Application Project structure from cProjects Structure Elements Project elements: project definition. For more information.

see Editing Functions for Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 214] Function Details [Seite 216] Constraints In order for the external WebDAV-compatible application to process all data from the cProjects or cFolders repository. you can work with a structure depth of eight levels. Archived documents can no longer be accessed via the WebDAV interface. phase. If documents or folders are created whose names have more than 35 characters. However. The date format for the Session Timeout is not WebDAV-compliant. checklist. multiple sessions are created for a user in the cProjects or cFolders system. documents) contained there. for example. the name of a folder can have a maximum of 35 characters.2008 Application Project structure from cProjects Entry Objects cProjects repository Project elements: project definition. this is not WebDAV-compliant and can lead to names being misinterpreted by the WebDAV application. cFolders Documents without a version (file) cannot be accessed via the WebDAV interface. task Collaboration structure from cFolders cFolders repository Collaboration. work area. root folder. If you use WebDAV applications that are not supported by SAP. If. you specify a naming convention of 30 characters for each hierarchy level. you can navigate in the project and collaboration structure and access the structure elements (for example. Only the newest version of documents that have several versions can be accessed via the WebDAV interface. folder Editing cProjects and cFolders Structures In the WebDAV application. the name is cut off after 35 characters and is uniquely defined by a number. Collaboration Projects 208 . cProjects: DMS documents. In cProjects. This WebDAV application can currently process a URL of up to 180 characters as the WebDAV URL for an entry object. A new version of the document is created each time you save. status reports and documents that are only checked in as a link cannot be accessed via the WebDAV interface.09. note the following recommendations: Documents Document names can have a maximum of 35 characters.SAP Online Help 12. checklist item. Portal drive This WebDAV application can currently only process paths of less than 240 characters. For more information.

For a list of the functions. the timeout for the session is specified as being ten minutes in the cFolders and cProjects system. Therefore. see Function Details [Seite 216]. see SAP Library under Administration of the Internet Communication Manager. +. there will be a large number of active sessions in the standard system. folders. Collaboration Projects 209 . Prerequisites You have to configure the following data in the cProjects or cFolders system: You have to specify a server and a port for the HTTP protocol in the Internet Communication Manager. root folders. This means that a session in the cFolders or cProjects system is deleted if it has not been used for more than ten minutes. Activate the host cpro (WebDAV Interface for cProject Suite). For more information. these special characters must not appear in the names of the following objects: collaborations. and spaces. This section contains information about the configuration of the WebDAV interface in the cProjects or cFolders system and the configuration of a WebDAV repository manager in the portal.2008 The WebDAV interface of the cProjects or cFolders repository does not support all the functions that are provided on the user interface of the WebDAV application. If you enter a high value. work areas. you have to make a number of settings in the cProjects or cFolders system. default_host In the cross-client settings. <. \. see SAP Library under Components of SAP Communication Technology Communication Between ABAP and Non-ABAP Technologies Internet Communication Framework Internet Communication Framework Administration: HTTP Communication Using the SAP System Administration: HTTP Communication Using the SAP System as a Server. Technical Description and Configuration Information Purpose In addition to installing a SAP NetWeaver portal drive or a SAP NetWeaver portal as WebDAV clients. You can change the timeout predefined in the cpro host from the standard system. some of which may no longer be in use and this puts an unnecessary strain on the system performance. For more information.SAP Online Help 12. &. project elements. for example. #. see SAP Library under Activating an SICF Service. For more information. The standard system contains the host cpro in the HTTP service tree in the sap entry.09. and documents. You use an external alias to make the settings for a particular client. The following special characters may have a special meaning in the URL: %. You have to set up the HTTP communication with the SAP system as the server (transaction SICF Maintain Services). /. Choose External Aliases and create a new alias for the cpro node.

Process Flow Executing IMG Activities in cProjects and cFolders You make the system settings either in Customizing for cProjects or for cFolders. This number is part of the URL required for communication with the WebDAV application. For more information about the WebDAV URL. see Defining the WebDAV URL [Seite 212] and the Implementation Guide (IMG).09.2008 If you enter a low value. you set up the communication between a WebDAV application and a cProjects and/or cFolders repository. but only if an error occurs. Indicator for activating the WebDAV interface for cProjects or cFolders (mandatory) Settings for the WebDAV Interface. the data that was buffered in a session is very quickly lost. Collaboration Projects 210 . the buffered data is not read again on a regular basis. Documents Settings for the WebDAV Interface. For example. see SAP Library under Creating an Alias and Logging on to an SAP Web Application Server. a user only sees those projects below the entry object of the cProjects structure in which he or she is participating and for which the project work has not yet been completed. the WebDAV interface programs then have to read data from the database more frequently and this is detrimental to the system performance. In the standard process. Call Customizing in the SAP Reference IMG as follows: cProjects Choose Collaboration Projects cFolders Choose Collaboration Folders Carry out the following activities: Edit External IDs for the WebDAV Entry Objects (optional) Objects that can be used as entry objects [Seite 206] for the WebDAV interface are assigned a unique number (external ID). If you do not enter a value for the refresh time. For more information. For indexing (search function). The following data is part of the settings: WebDAV URL (mandatory): You enter the WebDAV URL that is valid for the cProjects and cFolders repository according to predefined conventions. a user is required who has read authorization for all the projects below the entry node. Index service (only for cProjects. Make Settings for the WebDAV Interface (mandatory) In this IMG activity. You specify this user here. Note the information in the Implementation Guide (IMG).SAP Online Help 12. In the portal. optional): This setting is only relevant if you use Knowledge Management in the SAP NetWeaver Portal as a WebDAV application. Refresh time in seconds (optional) The refresh time specifies the maximum amount of time that lapses before the buffered data is read again from the database. you have to map the user who carries out indexing to the user you entered for the index service in the cProjects system.

see Configuration of a WebDAV Repository Manager [Seite 211]. Configuring WebDAV Applications WebDAV Repository Manager in SAP Knowledge Management In order to have a cProjects or cFolders repository as a data source in the portal. For more information. the user does not need any administrator rights to use the software. Enter a System ID for your cProjects or cFolders system (for example.2008 Implementing Enhancement Spots (BAdIs) There is a BAdI for both cProjects and cFolders that you use to influence the selection of data (attributes of the objects) before transferring the data to the WebDAV application. 2. Once the portal drive has been installed. see the Implementation Guide (IMG). For more information. Portal Drive The portal drive is a desktop application that must be installed and configured on each computer on which you want to use it. Choose Singleton. Create a memory cache. Enter a similar value to the refresh time for the Default Time-to-Live. using the following steps: . see SAP Library under Introduction to Using SAP Software Working with Tools and Functions Working with Documents and Folders Working with Folders in Windows (Portal Drive).. see SAP Library under Knowledge Management Administration Guide System Administration System Configuration Content Management Configuration Global Services System Landscape Service System Landscape Definitions HTTP System. you have to configure a WebDAV repository manager in the portal. . The Capacity value depends on the number of frequently used resources within the repository.09. QPL). For more information.. . These BAdIs provide methods that you use to perform the following actions: Delete attributes that the standard system transfers to an object Change values of an attribute Add more attributes For more information about creating enhancement implementations. Configuration of a WebDAV Repository Manager Configure a WebDAV repository manager in the portal. Collaboration Projects 211 . see SAP Library under Knowledge Management Administration Guide System Administration System Configuration Content Management Configuration Utilities Caches and Components and Their Caches.SAP Online Help 12. For more information. See Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209]. Create an HTTP system for the cProjects or cFolders system. 1. The user must have administrator rights on the computer on which you want to install the portal drive..

see SAP Library under Knowledge Management Administration Guide System Administration System Configuration Content Management Configuration Repositories and Repository Managers External Repositories WebDAV Repository Manager Creating a System in the Portal System Landscape.sap.wdf. http://pwdf0500. System Path Enter the WebDAV URL part after the port.corp:44331/qpl090webdav/dpr In this case. You insert this WebDAV URL in the specified field in the WebDAV application. enter the following value as the System Path: /qpl090-webdav/dpr The WebDAV URL of the cFolders repository is http://pwdf0500. enter the following value as the System Path: /qpl090-webdav/cfx/cwn 4. For more information. Use an alias that is identical to the system ID of the HTTP system (see step 2). Enter an alias for the system. you have to create a system in the portal system landscape with the type HTTP System.wdf.corp:44331/qpl090webdav/cfx/cwn In this case. see SAP Library under Knowledge Management Administration Guide System Administration System Configuration Content Management Configuration Repositories and Repository Managers External Repositories WebDAV Repository Manager and the subdocuments of this topic.wdf.sap. This alias must match the system ID for your cProjects or cFolders system. Collaboration Projects 212 . in addition. Enter the admin user in the User Management property category. Defining the WebDAV URL You use the WebDAV URL to link a WebDAV application to an entry object from the cProjects or cFolders system. If you want to assign a user.SAP Online Help 12.09. 3.2008 Enter the Server URL in the following format: <protocol>://<server>:<port> (for example.corp:44331). Enter the following data: Name and Prefix System ID (Landscape Service) Enter the ID of the HTTP system.sap. Create a system in the portal system landscape. Cache Enter the memory cache. For more information. Create a WebDAV repository manager and configure it. The WebDAV URL of the cProjects repository is http://pwdf0500.

You can use three fields to define the URL and you can enter a maximum of 132 characters in each field. See Editing Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 218]. Example: system QPL and client 090: http://pwdf0500.wdf. The following overview describes how to add an extension to the URL. see Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209].corp:44331/sap/cpro You define a client-specific URL alias for /sap/cpro. . Application cProjects Extension of URL Add the following character string to the first part of the WebDAV URL that you defined in Customizing: /dpr Example: http://pwdf0500. 1. cFolders .. A popup appears that displays the WebDAV URL. Choose the Documents tab page and click WebDAV. WebDAV URL for the Entire Repository If you want to use the entire cProjects or cFolders repository as an entry object.sap.2008 WebDAV URL in Customizing You specify the first part of the WebDAV URL in Customizing for Collaboration Projects and Customizing for Collaboration Folders by choosing the activity Make Settings for the WebDAV Interface.corp:44331/qpl090-webdav/dpr Collaboration Projects 213 . choose WebDAV URL. or a cFolders folder as an entry object and you require the WebDAV URL that belongs to it..wdf. work area.SAP Online Help 12. 2.sap.09. you have to extend the first part of the WebDAV URL.. A popup appears that displays the WebDAV URL. 2. or checklist item) as an entry object and you require the WebDAV URL that belongs to it. The following convention applies to the URL: <protocol>://<server>:<port>/sap/cpro Example: http://pwdf0500.. WebDAV URL for Entry Objects cProjects . navigate to the relevant object in the cFolders application. 1..corp:44331/qpl090-webdav For more information. phase. . See Editing Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 218]. root folder. If you want to use a project element (project definition. task. Under Additional Functions. .wdf.sap. navigate to the relevant project element in the cProjects application. checklist. If you want to use a collaboration.

see Function Details [Seite 216].wdf. For more information about the functions. Create b.SAP Online Help 12. add the following character string to the WebDAV URL: /cfx Example: http://pwdf0500. you can conveniently edit these structures in the familiar environment of the Microsoft Windows File Explorer user interface. note the following: In order to avoid losing links to the collaborations when you replace the cFolders repository manager from the business package named above with the WebDAV repository manager.2008 cFolders Add the following character string to the first part of the WebDAV URL: /cfx/cwn Example: http://pwdf0500.09. Editing Functions for cProjects Objects a. you can edit these structures with the user interface in Knowledge Management. cProjects Objects d.corp:44331/qpl090-webdav/cfx/cwn Business Package for Design Collaboration 60. For example. Folder Collaboration Projects 214 .corp:44331/qpl090-webdav/cfx Editing Functions for Project and Collaboration Structures Use The project and collaboration structures in a cProjects or cFolders repository can be edited using external WebDAV-compatible applications.sap. If you have installed a portal drive.sap.1 system in the collaboration room. If you have configured a WebDAV repository manager in the SAP NetWeaver Portal for the cProjects or cFolders repository.wdf. Prerequisites See Integration with a WebDAV Client [Seite 206] and Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209]. Features The following tables list the functions you can use to edit the objects from the project structures and collaboration structures.2 If you are using this business package and have integrated collaborations from a cFolders 3. you can set up a TREX connection via the portal for the document search which ensures quick access to the documents in a cProjects or cFolders repository. Function c.

work area. you can link this external application to a cProjects or cFolders object and edit the objects below it. from cProjects to any local directory on your PC or server n. . . you can edit the objects below it using the standard Knowledge Management functions. phase. root folder Folder Document Copy (from an external system) Lock Folder Document Document Activities WebDAV Repository Manager If you have configured a WebDAV repository manager in the portal for an entry object in the cProjects or cFolders system. checklist item l. Portal Drive If you have installed a portal drive.. delete.SAP Online Help 12. Document p. checklist. delete cFolders Objects Folder Document Rename Root folder Folder Document Copy (to an external system) The following objects are copied in the same way as normal folders: collaboration. see Editing Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 218]. Document k. For more information.09. Folder h. Document g. Lock s. Copy (to an external system): j. Document Editing Functions for cFolders Objects Function Create. change. Project elements are copied in the same way as normal folders: project. from any local directory on your PC or server to cProjects r. task. Folder m. Collaboration Projects 215 .. Copy (from an external system): o.2008 e. Document f. Folder q. Change. rename i.

Rename Copy (to an external system) You can rename root folders. Since the system does not check whether a subdocument is locked. a local file system) to a cProjects or cFolders repository. the system ignores the locks placed on the subdocuments. It then writes them to the target system one by one. see Editing Functions for Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 214]. It then writes them to the target system one by one. folders. description. When you delete a folder. See Objects with the Same Name [Seite 217] Change You can extend an existing structure by creating a new object. The WebDAV client first loads all the folders and files that are to be copied. Copy (from an external system) You use a WebDAV client to copy an object from an external system (for example. check whether all the subdocuments can be deleted too. and documents. and so on). The WebDAV client first loads all the folders and files that are to be copied. before you delete an object. a folder or document) below a project element or folder. To do this. Lock You can lock documents. You can edit and save an existing document.09. See Objects with the Same Name [Seite 217] You use a WebDAV client to copy an object from a cProjects or cFolders repository to an external system (for example. You cannot change any attributes (status. Therefore. The following table displays an overview of the functions you can execute via the WebDAV interface.SAP Online Help 12. For an overview of the objects you can edit using these functions. Delete You delete an object. Function Create Details You can create an object (for example. Collaboration Projects 216 . a local file system).2008 Function Details Use You can edit the objects in the project and collaboration structures using a number of different functions. Note the information under Delete. it deletes all the subobjects including locked documents. Features The WebDAV interface of the cProjects or cFolders repository does not support all the functions that are provided on the user interface of the WebDAV application. You cannot create a folder or document directly below a collaboration or work area. you need at least write authorization for the document. This process creates a new version of the document in the cProjects or cFolders repository.

The default implementation supplied by the system can be found in the class CFX_UNIQUE_FOL_NAMES_DEFAULT. the WebDAV application checks whether the new name is unique.SAP Online Help 12. For example. This folder contains the document AB. the system issues an error message when the user tries to create a folder with the same name as an existing one. do not use the WebDAV interface. In order to identify the existing objects correctly. you can create folders with the same name by means of the user interface of the cFolders application or using the APIs. Creating and Renaming Objects via the WebDAV Interface When folders or documents are created or renamed via the WebDAV interface. If this user wants to create a new document with the name AB. this causes errors in WebDAV applications.09. the user is editing folder A. The user does not have read authorization for this object and therefore. see Customizing for Collaboration Folders under Business AddIns (BAdIs) Check Whether Duplicate Folder Names Can Be Created. he or she can do this without receiving any error messages. cannot see it.2008 Objects with the Same Name The WebDAV protocol specifies that each object in a collection (an object that can contain other objects) has a unique name. objects with the same name are permitted. cFolders In the standard system. the WebDAV interface uses the following method to ensure that the names of project elements (cProjects) and collaborations and work areas (cFolders) are unique: The object type and a unique number are added on to the end of the name after a tilde. Displaying Existing Objects via the WebDAV Interface If two documents or folders with the same name exist in a single folder. We recommend that all users who edit documents and folders in a collection have read authorization for all the objects in this collection. This check only produces the correct result if the user has all the necessary authorizations and can see all the objects in the folder. the user for indexing) will then receive an error message for the content of folder A. For more information. Collaboration Projects 217 . If. The user must ensure that no folder names or document names appear more than once within a single folder. you can implement and activate the CFX_UNIQUE_FOL_NAMES BAdI in Customizing for Collaboration Folders.doc. Creating and Renaming Objects via cProjects and cFolders cProjects You cannot use the user interface of the cProjects application to create and change documents and folders that have the same name. A user who has read authorization for all the objects in folder A (for example.doc in folder A. If you do this. If you want to avoid duplicate names.

this is usually done by the portal itself. 1.SAP Online Help 12. Copy the WebDAV URL to the clipboard. a folder. a project element. a portal drive. Collaboration Projects 218 . For example. If. 6. Editing Project and Collaboration Structures Purpose You use an external WebDAV-compatible application. The portal drive then carries out the authentication for you. Go to the WebDAV application and enter this WebDAV URL in the specified field. Prerequisites See Integration with a WebDAV Client [Seite 206] and Technical Description and Configuration Information [Seite 209]. If you are working with a portal drive. as you have already authenticated your user here. 3. You display the object you want to edit in the external WebDAV application on the user interface of the cProjects or cFolders system. to edit the project and collaboration structures. you set up a new connection between a portal drive and a cFolders folder. 5. This report also gives you the option of automatically renaming folders that have the same name. use the CFX_UNIQUE_FOLDER_NAMES report. 4.2008 If you want to check whether folders with the same name occur in the same collection in your cFolders repository. for example. Depending on your WebDAV application. or a document. Display the WebDAV URL. As soon as the external application sends a request to the cProjects or cFolders system. for example. Process Flow . you enter your logon data to identify yourself for the cProjects or cFolders system.. This can be. cFolders Choose Additional Functions and then WebDAV URL in the application toolbar. If you are working in the portal. you have to authenticate your user when you first connect to it. Edit the cProjects or cFolders objects using the user interface of the external WebDAV application. create a new folder or a new document. This ensures that the names are unique. You call the WebDAV URL as follows: cProjects Choose WebDAV on the Documents tab page. The system opens a separate window and displays the path for the WebDAV URL. See Editing Functions for Project and Collaboration Structures [Seite 214]. 2. It is advisable to put organizational measures in place to ensure that documents are always assigned unique names. for example. enter more data as required and start the connection.09. you have to enter this path as the server URL.

2008 7. "project" is synonymous with "initiative" in the following sections. 2. In Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types. 2. 2. In the structure tree [Seite 41].09. you selected the cFolders checkbox in the Collaboration group box. 3. Collaboration Projects 219 . You installed and configured cFolders. 1. select the project element for which you want to create a collaboration.SAP Online Help 12. You installed and configured cFolders... Integration with cFolders Use You can use a collaboration [Extern] to exchange documents you created or assigned to a project in cProjects or document management (DMS) with internal or external partners. You are in the detail view of a project on the Collaborations tab page. Choose Create. Prerequisites . Your system administrator has permitted the use of collaborations for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types). If you are working with initiatives. 1. 1. For more information about cFolders. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot.. Procedure . Features Creating a Collaboration [Seite 219] Assigning an Existing Collaboration to a Project Element [Seite 220] Transferring Documents [Seite 221] Renaming a Collaboration or a Folder [Seite 222] Maintaining a Collaboration [Seite 223] Deleting a Link to a Collaboration [Seite 223] Creating a Collaboration Prerequisites . see Design Collaboration with cFolders [Extern]. The data from the external WebDAV application is transferred to the WebDAV application of the cProjects or cFolders system via the WebDAV interface.

Assigning an Existing Collaboration to a Project Element Use You can assign a collaboration or a folder of a collaboration to a project element. the system cannot create the collaboration. You are in the detail view of a project on the Collaborations tab page. b. the last three are only available if the corresponding documents already exist for the selected project element or the project type permits this function. The collaboration inherits the authorizations [Seite 242] of the project element to which it is assigned. If you only save the collaboration. choose the template here. the assignment of the collaboration to a project element in cProjects is lost. Decide whether you want to use a collaborative scenario [Extern] or a competitive scenario [Extern]. 8. Collaboration Projects 220 . Save the collaboration. or DMS status reports as the source. Change the name.09. 7. 4. you selected cFolders in the Collaboration group box under Define Project Types. DMS documents. The system opens the view for transferring documents. for which you have authorization and which are marked as templates (see Templates [Extern]). Choose Continue. Choose the source from which you want to assign documents to the collaboration. This field only exists if collaborations already exist in cFolders. if required. Prerequisites In Customizing for Collaboration Projects. The system creates the collaboration and displays the overview of the collaborations again.SAP Online Help 12. Select the target system on which your cFolders application runs under cFolders System. Create the collaboration in cFolders: a. If you want to use a different collaboration as a template for creating the new collaboration. 6.2008 3. You can transfer documents straight away or later on (see Transferring Documents [Seite 221] ). or link a collaboration or folder to a project element with a URL. if required. Result The collaboration is created in cFolders and assigned to a project element. If no target system is available. 5. You can use cProjects documents. Save the project. However. cProjects status reports. 9.

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Procedure
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41], select the project element to which you want to assign a collaboration. 2. Choose Assign Collaboration. 3. Select the target system on which your cFolders application runs under cFolders System. 4. You can choose from two options (you can activate the other option by deleting the current selection): Assign Collaboration or Folder via Search Help (option 1) Enter a collaboration or choose one using the search help. When you confirm the collaboration by choosing Enter, you have the option of assigning a single folder from the collaboration. Link Collaboration or Folder via URL (option 2) Enter the URL for a collaboration or folder. 5. Choose Continue. 6. Save the project.

Transferring Documents
Use
You can exchange documents between cFolders and cProjects and between cFolders and SAP document management (DMS) in both directions.

Prerequisites
You have a user in a cFolders system. You have created [Seite 219] or assigned a collaboration [Seite 220]. You are in the detail view of a project on the Collaborations tab page.

Procedure
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] select the project element of the collaboration to which you want to transfer data. 2. Select the collaboration whose data you want to compare with the data in cProjects. 3. Choose Transfer Documents. 4. Choose the document source. 5. You can use cProjects documents, cProjects status reports, DMS documents, or DMS status reports as the source. However, the last three are only available if the corresponding documents already exist for the selected project element or the project type permits this function. The system opens the overview. In the left area you see the documents in cProjects or in DMS and in the right area you see the collaboration in cFolders. The following functions are available: You can expand the folder structures with Collapse All. Collaboration Projects Expand All and collapse them with

221

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

To open a document before transferring it, select the document and choose Display. The system opens the document in the appropriate application. If you maintain the collaboration and the project at the same time, you can use Reread Collaboration to be sure that you see the current status of the collaboration. 6. Select the object you want to transfer [Extern] in one area and in the other area, select the target for the data you want to transfer. If the object you select already exists in the other area, the system selects the corresponding object in the other area automatically. 7. Choose with the quick info text Copy Folders/Documents from cFolders to cProjects with the quick info text Copy Folders/Documents from cProjects to cFolders. or The following table shows which transfer options are available: Selected Objects One folder in each area System Activity During Transfer The folder you want to transfer is assigned as a subfolder to the folder you selected as your target folder. The system transfers the current version of the document you want to transfer to the target system as the new version. The old version remains in the target system, but you cannot view it here. You can see it on the Documents tab page or in the collaboration in cFolders. You can transfer the document only. You cannot transfer the folder in this case. The system creates the document as a copy in the folder. 8. Save the collaboration.

One document in each area

A document in an area, a folder in another area

Renaming a Collaboration or a Folder
Prerequisites
You have created [Seite 219] or assigned a collaboration [Seite 220]. You are in the detail view of a project on the Collaborations tab page.

Procedure
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] select the project element of the collaboration or folder you want to rename. 2. Select the collaboration or folder you want to rename. 3. Choose Rename. 4. Enter the new name. 5. Choose Continue. The system adopts the new name.

Collaboration Projects

222

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

The system only changes the name of the collaboration or folder in cProjects and not in cFolders. If you want to change the name in cFolders, you must make the change in the cFolders system (see Maintaining a Collaboration [Seite 223]). 6. Save the project.

Maintaining a Collaboration
Use
You can maintain a collaboration only in the cFolders system, and not in cProjects.

Prerequisites
You have a user in a cFolders system. You have created [Seite 219] or assigned a collaboration [Seite 220]. You are in the detail view of a project on the Collaborations tab page.

Procedure
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] select the project element of the collaboration you want to maintain. 2. Select the collaboration you want to maintain. 3. Log on to the system, if necessary. 4. Maintain the collaboration. For more information, see Design Collaboration with cFolders [Extern].

Deleting a Link to a Collaboration
..

1. In the structure tree [Seite 41] select the project element whose link to a collaboration you want to delete. 2. Select the collaboration whose link you want to delete. 3. Choose Delete Link. The system deletes the link to the collaboration.

The collaboration itself still exists in cFolders. The only way to delete the collaboration is by opening it in cFolders and deleting it there (see Maintaining a Collaboration [Seite 223]). 4. Save the project.

Collaboration Projects

223

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

Integration with SAP Enterprise Portal
Use
This function enables you to use cProjects in the SAP Enterprise Portal by means of the Business Package for Projects, Portfolio Management, and Design Collaboration (PPMDC) [Extern]. Each user has access to various initial views (roles [Extern], worksets [Extern], and iViews [Extern]), depending on his or her authorizations and the portal roles assigned.

The back-end configuration of cProjects is not automatically reflected in the Portal because the content of the portal roles is static and is not adjusted to match. You create the appropriate portal roles and assign them to the PFCG roles so that the authorizations defined in the backend match the portal roles. To do this, you can use the predefined portal role project management [Extern] and the following showcase worksets as examples or templates: Decision Maker [Extern] Project Lead [Extern] Project Member [Extern] Template Responsible [Extern]

Alternatively, you can call cProjects in the Portal by means of a single iView. Since this iView contains the entire cProjects application, it is not necessary to adjust this iView to match the PFCG configuration of the backend. For more information, see SAP Note 938525.

There are differences between using cProjects in the Portal and using it as a stand-alone version:

When you use cProjects outside the Portal, the tab pages Info, Projects, Tasks, Checklist Items, and so on are available at the top navigation level in cProjects. These tab pages are not visible in the Portal unless you called cProjects by means of a single iView. This is because the relevant tab pages in the Portal are available through the worksets, pages, and iViews in the Business Package for PPMDC. If, for example, you open a project when using cProjects outside the portal, the top navigation bar (initial views) is hidden. If you are working in the Portal, the worksets and portal pages remain visible. When you use cProjects outside the Portal, the Info tab page is available at the top navigation level in cProjects provided that this setting was made in Customizing or in the user settings. In the Business Package for PPMDC, there is no iView or portal page that corresponds to the Info tab page. This is because any portal pages can be added to the Portal straight from the relevant workset and therefore, an additional page is not required as a standard setting. When you use cProjects outside the Portal, the Resource Planning tab page is available in cProjects at the top navigation level if you are using the resource planning application (RPA). When you use cProjects in the Portal, you can use the Resource Planner portal role from SAP CRM instead. For more information, see SAP Note 939501. When you use cProjects outside the Portal, the header area of the application is visible if the Display Header indicator is selected in the user settings. When you use cProjects in the Portal, the header area of the application is not visible and the Display Header

Collaboration Projects

224

SAP Online Help

12.09.2008

indicator is grayed out in the user settings because the system uses the header area of the Portal by default. The Exit link is not available when you use cProjects in the Portal because you log on to and log off from the Portal. The integration with virtual rooms [Seite 225] is only fully available in the Portal. For more information about using cProjects in the Portal, see SAP Note 938390. You can also use cProjects functions in the Portal by means of the Business Package for Project Self-Service. For more information, see SAP Library under SAP ERP SAP ERP Central Component Business Packages (Portal Content) Business Package for Project Self-Service.

If you want to navigate away and have forgotten to save your changes, you can use WorkProtect Mode in the Portal to avoid data loss. For example, you can set WorkProtect Mode up in such a way that the system asks the user whether the unsaved data should be saved before navigation. For more information about WorkProtect Mode, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under Getting Started – Using SAP Software First Steps Portal Personalizing the Portal Setting Portal Preferences.

Prerequisites
You installed SAP Enterprise Portal 7.0 and imported the Business Package for PPMDC.

Integration with Virtual Rooms
Use
You use this function to make cProjects documents available in virtual rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal. This gives you a single point of access to all documents you work with in your enterprise. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under SAP NetWeaver 2004 SAP NetWeaver People Integration Collaboration User Guide Working with Virtual Rooms.

Integration
In addition to creating virtual rooms, cProjects also allows integration with cFolders [Seite 219]. The two applications focus on different areas: Virtual rooms focus on the collaboration between different departments within a single enterprise. Together with cProjects, virtual rooms help you coordinate your project participants. cFolders focuses on exchanging technical documents and product structures, such as bills of material or iPPE structures, between external partners. When used in conjunction with cProjects, external project participants can complete tasks without having to access the cProjects system.

Prerequisites
You have set up virtual rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal. Your system administrator has activated this function in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Define Project Types and created Webservice ports by choosing Create Logical Ports.

Collaboration Projects

225

To create a virtual room. The room details show you which initial roles and which administrator roles are specified in the template.sap.pct.cprxrpm. Collaboration Projects 226 . they do not automatically become members of the virtual room. The system assigns the initial role specified in the template to the room members. you see the document structure of the project element whose room you have opened. the system automatically creates all project participants of the project element and lower-level project elements as room members. Assigning Roles The Assign Roles function allows you to assign a number of selected roles to all project participants in a virtual room. Initial roles and administrator roles are defined in the template. the system assigns the room members the following standard room roles: The user who created the room and the project element responsible are both assigned the administrator and member roles. You can either create the project participants as room members manually or use the Assign Roles function.sap. For more information about the prerequisites for WebDAV. Editing the Virtual Room from cProjects If you are a member of a room.admin_explorer_kmwebdav). You can delete them manually. All other project participants are assigned the member role. in addition. see Defining the WebDAV URL [Seite 212].kmwebdav) in the SAP Enterprise Portal. Even project participants who were not members of a room are assigned these roles. Adding or Deleting Project Participants at a Later Date If you delete project participants of a project element at a later date.pct. You can only use this template if you implement WebDAV. The selection you make here overwrites the roles used so far. When you create a room. Features Creating a Virtual Room You can create a single virtual room for each project element in a project structure. The room owner and the project element responsible are also assigned the administrative role that was specified in the template. If you use the cProjects standard template. the system does not delete these room members in the SAP Enterprise Portal automatically. The room owner and the project element responsible keep the administrative role specified in the template. you need write authorization for the relevant project element.2008 SAP supplies the standard template cProjects_Standard_Template for virtual rooms in cProjects. If you use a different template.09.cprxrpm. provided that they have a user in the SAP Enterprise Portal. Note that all project participants then have the same roles for the virtual room. The page contains the iView Admin Explorer KM WebDAV (com. you can define other roles. you can branch to the room by clicking the name of the room. The template uses the cProjects KM Content (WebDAV) page (com.SAP Online Help 12. If you add project participants to a project element at a later date. You cannot assign rooms that already exist. Depending on your authorization. You have to log on to the SAP Enterprise Portal.

The room members are only granted access to cProjects content once they have been assigned to the appropriate project element in cProjects as a project participant. Integration with SAP xRPM Use In cProjects. these members do not automatically have access to the contents of cProjects because cProjects authorizations are required for this. You can display the assigned SAP xRPM objects in cProjects by means of the Portfolio Data tab page. Activities To create a room. Prerequisites You have selected the xRPM indicator in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Project Types. For more information. All cProjects documents of the project element for which you are creating the room are available in the room once it has been created. the room members receive an e-mail informing them that they are assigned to the room and they receive a link to the room. You can do this manually. If you add room members to a room in the Portal. This assignment is the basis for a synchronization between the objects in cProjects and SAP xRPM. you have to delete this assignment manually in cProjects too. If you select Send Confirmation.SAP Online Help 12. Collaboration Projects 227 .2008 Click Detail to display the room’s administrative data. you can assign projects to portfolio items in SAP xApp Resource and Portfolio Management (xRPM). Making Changes to a Virtual Room in the SAP Enterprise Portal Changes to the room members in the SAP Enterprise Portal are not automatically transferred to cProjects. You can use categories to filter the rooms in the room directory in the SAP Enterprise Portal. You can also delete the room. choose Create Room in the lower half of the Collaborations tab page and enter your data. You can also assign phases in cProjects to decision points in SAP xRPM at a lower level. DMS documents are not available.09. see Related Objects Management [Extern]. If you delete a room that is assigned to a project element in cProjects.

You have write authorization for the project. to conveniently and easily keep stakeholders informed about the current status of the project.SAP Online Help 12. you can either create your own document info records or store the reports in the document info records that already exist. SAP DMS) . You have installed Adobe Acrobat Reader® on your computer.2008 Project Status Reports Use You use this function to summarize project data in reports and store them as project status reports. you receive a confirmation e-mail that it was sent. Once you have sent a report. You can enter comments in the reports and save the comments so that they can be reused in the next project status report. The reports are created as interactive PDF documents and stored either in cProjects or in document management (DMS) depending on the Customizing settings. Features The system provides a number of different report templates depending on the project type. for example. If you want to store the reports in document management. see SAP Solution Manager under Solutions/Applications SAP PLM Configuration Structures SAP cProject Suite 4.50 Basic Settings for cProjects Business Customizing Preparing the Creation of Project Status Reports. Choose one of the following options: Collaboration Projects 228 . If you want to store the reports in cProjects.09. The name of the folder is made up of the name of the template you are using and a sequence number. These can contain different kinds of data.. You can transfer other documents to the report folder that you can send together with the report. See also: Creating Project Status Reports [Seite 228] Editing Project Status Reports [Seite 230] Creating Project Status Reports Prerequisites You are on the Status Reports tab page in a project. Prerequisites Your system administrator has made the necessary settings for using project status reports in Customizing for Collaboration Projects. Procedure Creating Project Status Reports (Document Management. 1. However. You can send the reports that have been created by e-mail. the system creates a separate folder for each status report. For more information. the system generates a folder when creating a status report and the report is stored in this folder.

choose Delete Comments. Choose Continue or Send to send [Seite 230] the report straight away. choose Create Status Report and enter the data for the link. choose Create Link. open the document structure of a document info record and choose Create Status Report. 4. This applies to both steps. Select a template. Select a template.. If you create a link to a new document info record. 3. If you want to reuse the comments the next time you edit the report. Enter a comment. if required (see details above). The project status report is only created after the project has been saved in document management (DMS).2008 To create a new status report and a new document link at the same time. 5. 2. 5. 6. Choose Preview. see Working with Document Info Records [Seite 204]. See also: Editing Project Status Reports [Seite 230] Collaboration Projects 229 . choose Transfer Comments. If comments already exist that you do not want to reuse. 4. 1. Enter a comment. 3. The system creates and displays the report.SAP Online Help 12. Choose Save to save the report or Save & Send to send [Seite 230] the report straight away. The system creates and displays the report. Choose Preview. Choose New Status Report. 2. Creating Project Status Reports (cProjects) . The comments no longer appear the next time you call the status report. the system only displays the new info record when you save the project and choose Refresh. To create a new status report in an existing folder. The system then inserts the new status report directly below the document structure header. To create a new document link first and then create the status report in the next step. The project status report is also only created after the project has been saved in document management (DMS). if required.09. Save the project. For more information on creating the link.

Choose Send. Select the recipients of the e-mail in the list of recipients. You have write authorization for the project. Choose New Document. Select the folder or the document you want to send. Choose Send (if the report is stored in cProjects) or Send Status Report (if the report is stored in document management). Select the file you want to transfer and choose Continue. Enter a subject and then a text. 3. 6.2008 Editing Project Status Reports Prerequisites An e-mail address has been entered in your user master record.. You can use the Transfer Documents function to insert cProjects documents from the project definition in the document structure of the status report. 5. Save the project. For more information. If you store your reports in document management (SAP DMS). The system sends the document or report by e-mail including all the documents that are in the relevant folder. you have the following options: You can go to DMS from the overview page of the project status reports using the link (Open) and add your documents there. 4. Transferring Documents from the Hard Disk to a Folder (Only for Storage in cProjects) . Procedure Sending Reports . 3. If the required recipients are not on the list. 1. If no address has been entered. 2. For more information. see Transferring Documents [Seite 221]. You can transfer documents that are linked to the project definition from a collaboration. 2. if required. Under Attachment. you open the document structure of a document info record. include them by choosing Add. You have created a project status report [Seite 228]. A confirmation is sent to your e-mail address. You are on the Status Reports tab page.09. Including Documents from the Hard Disk in the DMS Folder If you want to include more documents in the report folder when storing reports in document management. you cannot send a report. The address is used as the sender’s address when sending a status report. see Working with Document Info Records [Seite 204] in the section entitled “Transferring Documents Between cProjects and SAP DMS”. 1.SAP Online Help 12. Collaboration Projects 230 . you can see all the documents that were sent with this e-mail..

09. You can create evaluations for both operational projects and project versions [Seite 148] by making the appropriate selection under Evaluations for. this is taken into account during the evaluation. Furthermore. Evaluations Use Evaluations give you an overview of your project data. the threshold values appear on the Status tab page for a project element (see Status Information for Project Element [Seite 257]). In order for data to be stored in the background. 2. in the favorites list [Seite 24] and the project list [Seite 25] on the start page. The use of aggregated values allows you to tell at a glance if threshold value violations exist somewhere in the project. When you create an evaluation. one of the following prerequisites must be met: Your system administrator has allowed the user to check threshold value violations or have them checked automatically when you save. For more information about other editing options. Features Aggregating Data Your system administrator can specify for each project type that the severities in a project are to be displayed in aggregated form. Data is saved in the background if you start a manual evaluation or if a background program is performing an evaluation. If a project contains a mirrored task [Seite 142]. the system checks whether predefined threshold values [Extern] have been violated.. 1. for example.2008 Editing Documents in a Report (Only for Storage in cProjects) . Your system administrator scheduled regular data extraction in the background in the SAP Menu under Collaboration Projects Evaluations Extract Project Evaluations. see Documents [Seite 198]. You can base your evaluation on the current project data or the last version of the data that was saved in the background. Choose Detail to go to the detail view of the documents. The system displays the document data. Prerequisites Your system administrator defined evaluations and made the required settings (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects Evaluations). Select a document. Collaboration Projects 231 . for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects Structure Define Project Types). You can branch from an evaluation directly to the corresponding project.SAP Online Help 12. Integration Evaluation results are used to highlight critical projects.

takes precedence over one set automatically. a severity that is set manually. the aggregated value is produced as follows: If a manual severity exists. the highest severity of a project element is the highest severity out of all your own severities. you can switch between the aggregated data and the data that has not been aggregated. If no manual severity exists.2008 The aggregated value of a project element is the highest severity of the subordinate elements or of the corresponding project element itself. You can display data from the evaluated project in the results view. Therefore. this is the highest degree of severity for a project element irrespective of whether there are higher automatic severities.SAP Online Help 12. The following graphic explains the logic: 200 0 200 180 0 180 200 200 100 Highest Severity Highest Automatic Severity Manual Severity Aggregated Severity 50 0 50 200 180 180 - 100 200 100 - 100 100 - 100 300 100 - 200 100 200 400 400 400 - See also: Favorites [Seite 235] Search [Seite 234] Creating and Displaying Evaluations [Seite 232] Exporting Evaluations [Seite 234] Creating and Displaying Evaluations Use You can create evaluations based on current data or based on the data that was last saved. Collaboration Projects 232 . When you do this. both automatic and aggregated.09. however.

4. Your system administrator scheduled regular data extraction in the background in the SAP menu under Collaboration Projects Evaluations Extract Project Evaluations.09. 1. in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Structure Define Project Types. Open the Evaluations initial view and go to the Evaluation tab page.. 1. You have the following options: If you want to create an evaluation or display a saved evaluation. To view information about a threshold value violation.. select an evaluation from the favorites dashboard. Procedure Creating Evaluations . Choose Evaluations. If there are multiple violations of threshold values. 3. Collaboration Projects 233 . You can obtain information about this violation if you position your mouse on the icon. Checking Evaluation Results The lower screen area displays the project data on which the evaluation is based. The system creates the evaluation and displays the results in the lower screen area. 2. 2. Enter the project or project version you want to evaluate. Choose Current Data or Saved Data to specify the data on which you want to base the evaluation. one of the following prerequisites must be met: Your system administrator allowed the current project type to be tested for threshold value violations either by the user or automatically by the system when you save. Expand the project structure if necessary. You have authorization for the authorization object CPRO_EVAL for the evaluations you want to use.SAP Online Help 12. the one with the highest severity is displayed. The system displays the project in the structure tree [Seite 41] with an icon [Extern] that displays whether threshold values have been violated and how critical the violation is.2008 Prerequisites Your system administrator defined the evaluations and made the required settings (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Evaluations). choose the icon next to the project element. Display the severities: You can also display them in aggregated form by choosing Aggregated. The threshold value violation that is displayed here may deviate from the display in the project view because the project view also takes manual severities into account that are not included in the evaluation. Select the evaluation you want to create. In order for data to be stored in the background. . 3.

Optional: Add evaluations that you use often to your favorites list. Carry out an evaluation. The data is saved in the background and is available for other evaluations (see the "Creating Evaluations" section). The system exports the data in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format and either saves it in a file or opens the data in Microsoft® Excel. 4.. However. 1.SAP Online Help 12. 2. See also: Exporting Evaluations [Seite 234] Exporting Evaluations Use You can export the data of an evaluation so that you can display it in a spreadsheet application. click the project element. Click the link next to it to display details of a structure element. The system creates the evaluations defined in Customizing and updates the icons accordingly.09. you can also open the file with any other spreadsheet application that converts CSV files. 4. choose Export. 3.. If there is more than one threshold value violation for the same project element. the system does not generate a link for every element type. Open a project or navigate to the project definition in an open project.2008 The system displays the information in the right-hand screen area. To export all evaluation data. 2. If you only want to export the parts of the project structure that are expanded. Choose Check in the general functions. 6. Collaboration Projects 234 . 3. Creating an Evaluation from Project Processing . choose Export All. However. the system displays all of them. See also: Creating and Displaying Evaluations [Seite 232] Search Use You use the evaluation search function to search for projects for which you want to carry out evaluations. To return to the data of a project element. Procedure . 5. 1. Decide whether you want to save the file to the hard drive or whether you want to open it straight away.

Favorites Use In the favorites list you can display projects with the evaluations you have to perform most often. If no saved data exists. Prerequisites You added a project with an evaluation to your favorites list on the Search [Seite 234] or Evaluation [Seite 232] tab page. If you want to use saved data. If you click this link. If required. You can display the result of the evaluation on the Evaluation tab page by clicking the link.2008 Prerequisites You are in the Evaluations initial view on the Favorites tab page. Activities Enter the required search criteria or choose an entry from the dropdown box and choose Find. the system creates an evaluation based on the current data and displays the result on the Evaluation tab page. see Creating and Displaying Evaluations [Seite 232]. For more information about creating evaluations. Collaboration Projects 235 . the column is empty. your system administrator must schedule data extraction in the background. The system displays the date of the last data extraction in the Saved Data column. The system displays the Execute link in the Current Evaluation column.09. You are in the Evaluations initial view in the Favorites view of the dashboard. Your system administrator has allowed threshold value violations to be checked by the user or checked automatically on saving. Your system administrator defined the evaluations and made the required settings (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Evaluations). One of the following prerequisites must be met if you want to use stored data: Your system administrator scheduled regular data extraction in the background in the SAP menu under Collaboration Projects Evaluations Extract Project Evaluations.SAP Online Help 12. add a project with the corresponding evaluation to the favorites list [Seite 235] by choosing Add to Favorites. Features You can search in the search results by re-entering one or more than one search criteria and then choosing Search in Results. for the current project type (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Define Project Types).

The project leader begins the approval [Seite 238]. From then on you cannot change the phase data. The decision makers grant their individual approvals or reject them [Seite 238]. select it and then choose Remove from Favorites. If no saved data exists. For example. The decision makers can sign a document independently of one another and in any order. You do this under Define Phase Types. An approval cannot be withdrawn once it has been granted. Approving a Phase Purpose Approvals are part of phases in a project. The system uses signatures for individual approvals to ensure that the decision has actually been made by the correct decision maker: Normally. that is. 3. Activities To delete an object from the favorites list. defined by the project leader. If you click this link. The project leader creates an approval [Seite 237].. Once the last phase has been approved. The phase can only be ultimately approved if all individual approvals have been granted. You can display the result of the evaluation on the Evaluation tab page by clicking the link. Process Flow . your system administrator can configure the settings in Customizing for Collaboration Projects so that no approval is necessary. you can only confirm tasks that are not relevant to the approval. 4. This document contains all approval-relevant information and cannot be changed at this point. The project leader rejects the approval of the phase. Once a phase has been approved you can begin processing the following phase.SAP Online Help 12. The phase is formally completed once it has the status [Seite 252] Completed. if appropriate [Seite 240]. The system displays the date of the last data extraction in the Saved Data column. the maintenance of data for a phase is limited. Collaboration Projects 236 .. However. the column is empty. 1. They document that goals were attained during a phase which are required for the successor phases or for completing a project. 2. you enter the password for your user. The approval is made by any number of decision makers. you can complete the project. see Creating and Displaying Evaluations [Seite 232].09. The system displays the Execute link in the Current Evaluation column. There is no need to enter a user and password. After the approval. The decision makers grant or reject the individual approval based on the approval document. the system creates an evaluation based on the current data and displays the result on the Evaluation tab page. unless your system administrator has made different settings. For more information. the system assigns digital signatures using the private key of the user certificate.2008 Features The icon in the Criticality Level column shows whether an evaluation produced a threshold value violation and how severe the violation is. When you use signatures with user certificates.

6. However. You selected a phase in the structure tree [Seite 41] of the project and are on the Approval tab page. Note that you can only specify roles to which a person with a user name has been assigned as decision makers. The system automatically enters the approval version: You cannot change it. You cannot specify an organization as the decision maker. Add other decision makers. 1.09. Prerequisites You created project roles (see Creating a Project Role [Seite 97]). you must have assigned a person by the time you want to begin the approval. The system offers you the required entry fields. You can change the person at a later date. The system enters the role and the assigned person as the decision maker. The Decision Maker dropdown box contains all project participants who match these criteria..SAP Online Help 5. as required. to determine decision makers. Collaboration Projects 237 . 5. Choose Transfer. 4. Go to the Decision Maker tab page and choose Add. Enter a name for the approval and add a comment as required. Select the project role you want to add as the decision maker. 8. Procedure . 6. 12. the project leader can cancel the approval [Seite 239] at any time. Select a person as the Decision Maker. The project leader grants the approval of the phase [Seite 241]. The project leader begins the approval again [Seite 240]. Choose Create. You opened a project for processing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). The phase type of the relevant phase requires an approval (see Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Structure Define Phase Types). Save your entries. 7.2008 Until the phase has been approved. Creating an Approval Use Before you can begin the approval process you must create an approval. You can also assign the decision maker at a later date. 3. for example. 2.

Your system administrator must make the relevant settings if you want to use a digital signature with a user certificate for the individual approval. You opened a project for editing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]) and are on the Approval tab page. Once all prerequisites have been met. Beginning an Approval Prerequisites You created an approval and entered a decision maker (see Creating an Approval [Seite 237]). Choose Begin Approval. Collaboration Projects 238 . Prerequisites You opened an individual approval in the Approvals initial view. Procedure . Create a comment. 2. you can begin the approval [Seite 238]. The system starts the approval process: It creates an approval document containing all phase-relevant data. The approval appears in the Approvals initial view for the decision makers. In the structure tree [Seite 41] navigate to the phase you want to approve. 1.. The decision makers can grant or reject the individual approval [Seite 238]. Granting or Rejecting Individual Approvals Use Each individual decision maker confirms that the intended results of a phase have been achieved using an individual approval. 1.09. The phase to which the approval belongs has the status Released and all approvalrelevant tasks and checklist items have been completed or finished (see Confirming Tasks [Seite 89] and Confirming Checklist Items [Seite 89]). 2.SAP Online Help 12. Procedure Granting an Individual Approval . 3.. Check the approval document. The phase receives the status For Approval. if required.2008 Result The approval is created.

Once you have added your digital signature. Result The system saves your decision. 12. 4.SAP Online Help 3. You can begin [Seite 240] the approval again once you have corrected the reason for which the approval was canceled. Canceling an Approval Use You can cancel an ongoing approval process at any time. Choose Cancel Approval. Collaboration Projects 239 . You selected a phase in the structure tree [Seite 41] of the project and are on the Approval tab page.. Create a comment. Choose Grant Approval. you can also grant or reject the approval of the phase (see Granting an Approval [Seite 241] and Rejecting an Approval [Seite 240]). Save your data. 3. To confirm the approval with your digital signature. 2. Rejecting an Individual Approval . You can still change your decision at this point by choosing Change Decision. you cannot make any more changes. The approval of the phase has not yet been granted or rejected (see Granting an Approval [Seite 241] and Rejecting an Approval [Seite 240]). Prerequisites You opened a project for editing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). Procedure . Choose Transfer. 5. You can still change your decision at this point by choosing Change Decision.09. depending on your system settings. either enter your cProjects password or sign the document in Adobe® Reader. The system cancels the approval process and sets the status of the phase [Seite 252] to Released.. if required. Choose Reject Approval. 1. 1. Once all decision makers have either granted or rejected the approval. 2. Result The approval is canceled.2008 4. Check the approval document. Choose Transfer.

Prerequisites You opened a project for processing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]).SAP Online Help 12. 2. You can approve a phase despite not all individual approvals having been granted if your system administrator made the appropriate settings. Choose Complete from the Change Status dropdown box. However. If this is the case. you can also complete the phase if you are of the opinion that the desired results of the phase cannot be achieved. You can begin the approval again [Seite 240]. Procedure . you cannot make any more changes to the project. 4. you reject the approval too. Collaboration Projects 240 . This means that the rejected approval remains documented in the system.2008 Rejecting an Approval Use If some decision makers did not approve a phase by rejecting their individual approvals. The approval is rejected. Open the Basic Data tab page. You can only cancel it.. 3. you can begin the approval process again once you have eliminated the reasons for the rejected approval. Save your entries. You selected a phase in the structure tree [Seite 41] of the project and are on the Approval tab page. Choose Reject Approval. The system sets the status of the phase [Seite 252] to Approval Rejected. In this case the system creates a new version of the approval. You can check the individual decisions on the Decision Maker tab page in the Decision column.09. Prerequisites You opened a project for editing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]). as a rule. The phase is assigned the status Completed. 5. Save your data. proceed as follows: If you complete the phase now. 1. Beginning an Approval Again Use If you canceled or rejected an approval.

SAP Online Help 12. begin with the second step directly. Choose Begin Approval. Manual completion You grant the approval yourself and complete the phase yourself. If you canceled the approval. This can happen in one of two ways: . Once you have granted the approval for a phase. 3. Automatic completion If your system administrator has made the appropriate settings. You can approve a phase despite not all individual approvals having been granted if your system administrator made the appropriate settings. you cannot add any new tasks or checklists to the phase although the phase has not been completed yet. Choose Create Version. Granting an Approval Use A phase can be approved once all individual approvals have been granted in an approval process. The system starts the approval process: It creates an approval document containing all phase-relevant data. The system generates a new version of the approval. 1. The system resets the status of the phase [Seite 252] to Released. The decision makers can grant or reject the individual approval [Seite 238]. see SAP Note 982071. 2. 2. Save your entries. you do not have to take any further action. In this case. the phase is automatically approved as soon as all decision makers have granted their individual approvals. Collaboration Projects 241 . Procedure Carry out the first step only if you rejected the approval.09. Prerequisites You opened a project for editing (see Opening a Project or Project Version [Seite 17]).. The phase receives the status For Approval. The following describes the process for manual completion. Choose Repeat Approval.2008 You selected a phase in the structure tree [Seite 41] of the project and are on the Approval tab page. The approval appears in the Approvals initial view for the decision makers. .. You can check the version number on the General Data tab page. 1. For more information. It is also possible to complete the phase automatically once the approval is complete. 4.

The system sets the status of the phase to Approval Granted. General authorizations Your system administrator creates these authorizations in the authorization profiles in the user master record. 2. If your system administrator has made the appropriate settings. Choose Grant.. Prerequisites Your system administrator created users. If there are no more approval-relevant checklist items and tasks. Basic Collaboration Projects 242 . Choose Complete from the Change Status dropdown box.SAP Online Help 12. In cProjects there are two different types of authorizations: . and organizational units. 1. Project-specific authorizations You issue these authorizations to the project participants for individual objects.2008 You selected a phase in the structure tree [Seite 41] of the project and are on the Approval tab page. Authorizations Use Authorizations ensure that only authorized persons can see or process a project or parts of a project. you can approve a phase even if not all individual approvals were granted. Open the Detail Data tab page. 3. 1. 5. Once you have completed the phase. you cannot make any more changes to it.. Your system administrator created default authorizations for project roles in Customizing for Collaboration Projects by choosing Resource Management Settings for Project Roles Define Project Role Types. 2.09. Save your data. roles. You can check this on the Decision Maker tab page in the Decision column. All decision makers have granted their individual approvals. 4. You created user groups [Seite 248] as required. you can complete the phase. Save your entries. The phase is given the status Completed. Procedure .

an inherited authorization can also take priority over the others (see the section entitled “Prioritizing Authorizations”). for example. and control plan templates Every cProjects user has authorization to execute these functions.SAP Online Help 12. Authorization Holders The following authorization holders are available: . If you are adding users to a project element as authorization holders. the user still has the authorizations he or she obtained via the project role. 1. You automatically have administration authorization for a project you created. Authorizations specific to a project element are inherited by lower-level project elements. The authorizations that have specifically been granted to an authorization holder take priority over the authorizations that have been inherited by this authorization holder. changing. who have not been assigned to a project role yet or who do not have any authorization via this role. Project-Specific Authorizations You can grant these authorizations. you have to delete them manually (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). If an authorization has been inherited. displaying. you must at least give them display authorization for the project definition. the user is granted the default authorizations that belong to this role for the project definition.. However. add any number of additional authorization holders at each hierarchy level or change existing authorizations (see Assigning Authorizations [Seite 245]). Collaboration Projects 243 . This also applies if the users have more than just display authorization for a particular project element. and deleting project templates. If you want to remove the authorizations. however. Organizational units 4. Once you assign a user to a project role [Seite 126]. if a project participant has different authorizations acquired via different authorization holders. Roles (single or composite roles) Here you can also enter authorization holders to whom no project roles [Seite 94] are assigned. otherwise they cannot open any project elements in this project. checklist templates. if they have write authorization.09. If you delete the assignment of a user to a project role. you can recognize this by the entry in the Inherited from column.2008 Features General Authorizations These authorizations safeguard the following functions: Creating projects Creating. You can. User groups 3. Individual users 2.

Admin You receive this authorization automatically from the system when you create a project. actual finish date. Write You receive this authorization automatically from the system if you were entered as the person responsible for or the processor of a project element. detection.2008 The so-called order of authorization holders represents a prioritization of authorizations. You can use this authorization for all the activities you have to perform as the person responsible for or the processor of a project element or document: Enter actual values for a task or checklist item These are: Checklist item: Actual finish date. If.SAP Online Help Prioritizing Authorizations 12. for example. If you want to delete the project element. and control plans for a project element. an authorization inherited by a user carries more weight than the authorization for a project element assigned to a user by means of a user group. edit. a single user has write authorization for a task and acquires read authorization for the same task via a user group. and delete collaborations. edit. even if he or she has the authorization for a superior object. severity. result. object links. Authorizations The following project-specific authorizations are available: No authorization This authorization withdraws all authorizations for an object from a user. Collaboration Projects 244 . percentage complete. write.09. Individual users carry more weight than user groups and user groups carry more weight than roles. You can use this authorization to perform the following activities: Change all the data in a project element or document Delete project elements Create additional project elements Grant authorizations to other project participants Plan the schedule for project elements Initiate the approval of a phase The authorization includes the read and write authorizations. Create. and delete documents for a project element. confirmation. you require write authorization for the superior project element and administrative authorization for the document itself. the authorization of the single user applies. Prioritization also applies to inherited authorizations. occurrence. status Task: Actual start date. Create. in this case. This is important if a user has acquired a number of different authorizations for an object via different authorization holders. for example. status Change the status of a checklist.

the system displays all project roles with the staffing type Resource Manager via Authorization and these are staffed by candidates in the worklist of the external resource management application. or grant approvals Create relationships for tasks Change the status of the project definition or phase The authorization includes read authorization. cancel. or read. Assigning Authorizations Use The authorization holders to whom you grant authorization for a project element must have at least display authorization for the project definition that belongs to the project element. he or she will not be able to open a project element even if they have authorization to do so. Otherwise. the system displays all project roles with the staffing type Resource Manager via Authorization and these are staffed by resources in the worklist of the external resource management application.2008 Set manual threshold value violations Grant the individual approval of a phase You cannot perform the following activities with this authorization: Create and delete project elements Change authorizations Plan dates Begin.09. you can carry out costing and display data from accounting with this authorization. When you perform the evaluation. the system checks for each displayed object whether the project participant has at least read authorization. write.SAP Online Help 12. Staffing manager If you are a staffing manager. Collaboration Projects 245 . you can grant the following authorizations for the project definition: Evaluate This authorization enables you to perform evaluations for the project. Candidate manager If you are a candidate manager. In addition to admin. Accounting If you already have admin authorization. Read This authorization enables you to display all data for the project element or document. Resource management This authorization enables you to find and assign resources in a project.

The system opens an input area. You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot.2008 Here you can assign authorizations for an object or change authorizations. Add more authorization holders or close the input area. Choose Add. the system checks whether it can assign a unique user and then adds the missing data automatically if possible.. 3. For more information. 2.09. The authorizations you enter for templates are only authorization templates: They are not used for the authorization check in the template.SAP Online Help 12. Select one or more authorizations from the search results. 4.. If you enter incomplete data and choose Enter. Change the authorizations in the table. When you create an operational project in the template they are copied to the project. 5. You can use placeholders (* and +) here too. In the authorization holder type Roles. but in the operational project. The authorizations you specify for user groups are only valid for the actual user group and not for the project elements to which you assign the group later on. but the roles that your system administrator created in SAP authorization management. see Authorizations [Seite 242]. Choose Copy. Procedure Adding Authorization Holders . You need at least read authorization for a user group to be able to use it in a project. Changing Authorizations . A search function is also available. change. Enter the data of the new authorization holder. Collaboration Projects 246 . the roles are not the project roles you can create yourself in cProjects. or delete authorizations. Prerequisites You accessed project processing through one of the following initial views: Projects Tasks Checklist Items User Groups Templates You are on the Authorizations tab page on the sub-tab page with the authorization holder type for which you want to add. 1. You save your entries by saving the project.

Therefore.SAP Online Help 12. 3.09. Collaboration Projects 247 . This is possible for the object categories user group. 2. You also require change authorization for the project. the system issues an error message. Result The system adds the new administration authorization to the table of existing authorizations and issues a success message. the system issues an error message. Deleting Authorization Holders Note that you can only delete authorizations at the level at which you assigned them. You can only create a new administration authorization once the object and user have been correctly selected or entered. Read. a role or profile that contains the authorizations for the authorization object Create Administration Authorizations for Each Object Type (ACO_OTYPE) must be assigned to your user in the user master (SU01). user group. The table is only displayed in change mode here. document. Select an authorization holder in the list and choose Delete. Write. or document or you need superuser [Seite 250] authorization. Prerequisites To create new authorizations. Choose Save to save the authorization you created to the database. If the object does not exist. Select the required object or enter its name in the relevant input field. you cannot delete inherited authorizations. If the user is already entered as an administrator. The system checks whether the user exists. the system issues an error message. Select a user or enter the name of the user in the relevant input field. .2008 You cannot change your own authorizations for Admin. Assigning Administration Authorization Use Here you can create administration authorization for individual users. or No Authorization. Procedure 1. displays the existing authorizations in a table. and project. The system checks whether the object exists and if it does.. Select an object category. 4. If the user does not exist.

The following views are available in the User Groups initial view: The User Groups view displays all the groups to which you are assigned. Detail View On the right side of the screen. You can either open the user groups straight from the list or use the appropriate pushbutton. Once you have finished editing the user group. Features This function is available in the User Groups initial view. Collaboration Projects 248 . You can use placeholders (* and +) here too. You do this on the Basic Data tab page.SAP Online Help 12.09. To leave the user group once you have finished editing. you grant the user groups authorization to edit or display the user group. The system checks whether the user exists. If the check is successful. choose Create Authorization. The system then calls the table of authorizations again and displays the new authorization in the table. By default the use of user groups does not depend on authorizations. End of the note. save your entries. User Groups You use user groups to grant the same authorizations for a project element to multiple project participants. you can add users to the group or delete users from the group in the left screen area. Note The authorizations you specify here only apply to the actual user group and not to the project elements to which you assign the group later on. also in alphabetical order. You can also delete the user group here or add it to your Favorites. A search function is also available. If you enter incomplete data in the Add screen area and choose Enter. You group the project participants together in a user group and assign the group to the project element. A user group can be made up of both individual project participants and a number of other user groups. List of Members Once you have opened a user group. The Favorites view displays all the groups you selected as your favorites. The system first sorts the list of members alphabetically by surname and then sorts the user groups. this button is now active. the system checks whether it can assign a unique user or a group and then adds the missing data automatically if possible. choose Home. Enter the required user in the relevant input field.2008 Example You can select the object category user group and then select an object using the input help.

In the As Project Lead view. and your business partner is linked to your user. The substitute remains in the project until you delete his or her name from the list of substitutes. The project member who you assigned as a substitute receives a copy of this e-mail. you are participating in the project. Here you can enter a substitute for each project in which you are acting as project lead and to which the user that requires a substitute is assigned by means of a responsible or editing project role or resource. the Substitute For field contains your name only. For more information. you see the projects for which you are acting as a substitute in the Projects. The substitute remains in the project until you or the relevant project member deletes the name of the substitute from the list of substitutes. see SAP Note 999529.2008 Substitute Use The following views are available in the Substitute initial view: My Substitutes and As Project Lead. select the name of the project member for whom you want to define substitutes. Tasks. In the My Substitutes view. In this field. The system only displays a project in the project list on the Substitute tab page if you have at least read authorization for the project definition. the system displays the name of the user in the Substitute For field but does not display the affected project in the Substitute table. Your substitute is assigned the same authorizations as you.09. Collaboration Projects 249 . Prerequisites The system can only send an e-mail if an e-mail address has been entered in the user master data of the appropriate project members. The following applies to both views: The substitute receives the same authorizations as the project member he or she is substituting. If the user that requires a substitute is staffed in a project role in a project for which you are the project lead but the role or resource has not been used yet in the project structure. or Checklist Items initial views when you choose the Substitutes view from the dropdown box. As the substitute. the system determines all projects in which you are defined as the project lead in the project definition by means of the responsible role or resource.SAP Online Help 12. When you create or delete a substitute. The Substitute For field displays all users that are assigned to at least one project role in at least one of these projects. The same prerequisites apply to the list of your projects as to the project list [Seite 25]. Here you can enter a substitute for each project to which you are assigned by means of a responsible or editing project role or resource. the system sends an e-mail to each substitute affected.

Status of the Project Definition Definition The following statuses exist for the project definition: Collaboration Projects 250 . and the administrative tasks have to be given to another person. In this case. we recommend that you only use it if absolutely necessary.09. a superuser can grant another user administration authorization for the object. However.2008 Superuser Use This scenario allows you to bypass the authorization concept in cProjects and cFolders. for example. These are represented by statuses in the system. Status Management Use Project elements.SAP Online Help 12. control plans. Prerequisites To grant a user superuser rights. The statuses of the following objects are depicted using status management: Project definition [Seite 250] Phase [Seite 252] Checklist [Seite 254] Checklist item [Seite 255] Task [Seite 254] Template [Seite 253] Control plan [Seite 256] Integration Status management is coupled with the workflow [Seite 66]. it may be that no authorization holder with administration authorization is available due to illness. you have to add a role or profile to the user’s user master record (transaction SU01) that gives the user authorization for the authorization object ACO_SUPER. At least one person is always assigned to an object who has administration authorization for this object. and templates in cProjects can have various processing statuses. Therefore.

The project has been completed. checklist items) can be changed either. New phases cannot be inserted before or between phases that have already been approved. Phases may only be added. or deleted if the project definition has the status Created or Released. or template is locked. Locking a phase does not influence the status of the project definition. If a project is canceled. only canceled. When a project definition is locked or unlocked.09. Completed Canceled To Be Archived Flagged for Transfer The project can be archived. Phases can only be released if the project definition has been released and is not locked. If a project definition. The project definition can only be completed if the last phase has been approved. The project was not completed successfully. If a phase has not been approved. The project has successfully been assigned. This status is only relevant if you selected a manual controlling method for accounting integration or have switched to manual assignment. Once a phase has been approved.2008 Status Created Released Locked Meaning The project has been created in the system (initial status). Transferred Assigned The project has successfully been transferred to SAP ECC. phase. the next phase is released. Collaboration Projects 251 . See Releasing Project Elements [Seite 82].SAP Online Help 12. The project definition can only be unlocked. the status Locked is not set or removed for the released phases. the project cannot be completed. Integration The following dependencies exist between the status of phases [Seite 252] and the status of the project definition: The release of the project definition leads to the release of the first phase of the project. The next phase is not released. The project is temporarily protected against changes. To Assign The project is selected for transfer to SAP ECC. This status is only relevant if you selected an automatic controlling method for accounting integration [Seite 162]. no dependent data (for example. You can set the status at the same time as the status Created or Released. project role staffings after the date the project was canceled are also canceled. The project is selected for transfer to SAP ECC. modified.

modified.SAP Online Help 12. You can configure the system so that this status is set automatically after the approval has been granted. For Approval Approval Granted Approval Rejected Completed The phase has not been approved. Integration Dependencies between the status of phases: You cannot insert new phases before or between phases that have already been approved. Dependencies between the status of the project definition [Seite 250] and the status of phases: The release of the project definition leads to the release of the first phase of the project. You can configure the system so that this status is set automatically after the last individual approval has been granted. Collaboration Projects 252 . See Releasing Project Elements [Seite 82]. You can configure the system so that this status is set automatically after the approval for the preceding phase has been granted. The phase is to be approved. Phases may only be added. The phase has been completed. Depending on the settings you made in Customizing for Collaboration Projects under Define Phase Types. the following dependencies apply: You can release a phase only once the approval for the preceding phase (if one exists) has been completed. or deleted if the project definition has the status Created or Released. Locked The phase is temporarily protected against changes.2008 Status of Phases Definition The following statuses exist for phases: Status Created Released Meaning The phase has been created in the system (initial status). The phase has been approved. You can release a phase if the preceding phase has been released. You can set the status parallel to the status Created or Released. Phases can only be released if the project definition has been released and is not locked.09. No further changes can be made.

you cannot change any dependent data (for example checklist items) either. and the status of phases: The release of the phase leads to the release of all the tasks and checklists. You must release them first. The template is released for further use. Obsolete The template cannot be used any more. Existing references can still be resolved. Dependencies between the status of tasks [Seite 254].SAP Online Help 12. the status Locked is not set or removed for the released phases.2008 If a phase has not been approved. but only canceled. If a template is locked. The project definition can only be completed if the last phase has been approved. Released Locked You can set this status parallel to the status Created or Released. status of checklists [Seite 254]. Locking a phase does not influence the status of the tasks or checklist items. project templates. Locking a phase does not influence the status of the project definition. the project cannot be completed. The project definition can only be unlocked. The project definition can only be unlocked. no dependent data (for example. However. checklist items) can be changed either. The template is temporarily protected against changes. it is not possible to process the tasks or checklist items if the phase is locked. For checklist templates: You cannot create any new references to templates for which this status is active. It is possible to release tasks and checklists before releasing the phase. When a project definition is locked or unlocked. and control plan templates: Status Created Meaning The template has been created in the system (initial status). Status of Templates Definition The following statuses exist for checklist templates. What you should know You cannot use templates with this status in cProjects yet. If a project definition. status of checklist items [Seite 255]. a phase. The next phase is not released. or a template is locked.09. The release of a checklist item leads to the release of the assigned tasks. Collaboration Projects 253 .

it is not possible to process the tasks if the phase is locked. Locking a phase does not influence the status of the tasks. The task is not completed successfully. To Be Archived The template can be archived. the system warns you if not all the existing references were resolved. actual data is confirmed. and control plans. projects.SAP Online Help 12. The processing of the task is completed.09. However. You can only use templates with the status Released to create checklists. the subtasks are also canceled. Integration The following dependencies exist between the status of phases [Seite 252] and the status of tasks: The release of the phase leads to the release of all the tasks. For checklist templates: This status can only be set if all the references were resolved. Status of Checklists Definition The following statuses exist for checklists: Status Meaning Collaboration Projects 254 . See Releasing Project Elements [Seite 82]. It is possible to release tasks before releasing the phase. Status of Tasks Definition The following statuses exist for tasks: Status Created Released In Process Completed Canceled Meaning The task has been created in the system (initial status). The task is processed. If the task is canceled.2008 If you set this status.

the system automatically sets the result to Not relevant too. However.09. Integration The following dependencies exist between the status of phases [Seite 252]. The following dependencies exist between the status of tasks [Seite 254] and the status of checklist items: If a checklist item has the status Not Relevant. The checklist item is not relevant. See Releasing Project Elements [Seite 82]. you cannot edit the checklists if the phase is locked. If this status is set. The checklist is not relevant. Finished The checklist item is finished.2008 Created Released Not Relevant Finished The checklist has been created in the system (initial status). The checklist is finished. The release of the checklist leads to the release of all the checklist items. Locking a phase does not influence the status of the associated checklists. See Releasing Project Elements [Seite 82]. If a checklist has the status Not Relevant. however it is not possible to process a checklist item if the phase is locked. It is possible to release a checklist before releasing the phase. status of checklist items [Seite 255]. and status of checklists: The release of the phase leads to the release of all the checklists. you cannot process the checklist items that belong to it. Integration The following dependencies exist between the status of phases [Seite 252].SAP Online Help 12. The release of the checklist leads to the release of all the checklist items. you cannot process the tasks that belong to it. status of checklists [Seite 254] and status of checklist items: Locking a phase does not influence the status of checklist items. Collaboration Projects 255 . Status of Checklist Items Definition The following statuses exist for checklist items: Status Created Released Not relevant Meaning The checklist item has been created in the system (initial status).

you cannot make any other changes. Integration If the project is locked. Only the functions Delete and Move are possible in this status. The control plan version is temporarily protected against changes. no changes can be made to the control plan. You can set the status parallel to the status Created or Released.09. Status of Documents Definition The following statuses exist for documents: Status In Process Invalid Meaning The document can be changed. Completed When you create a new control plan version. Collaboration Projects 256 . Do not use the document. The control plan version is completed. the system sets the status of the preceding version automatically to Completed. The control plan version is released for processing. completed or terminated.SAP Online Help 12. You can set a document with this status to In Process again.2008 Status of Control Plan Versions Definition The following statuses exist for control plan versions: Status Created Released Locked Meaning The new control plan version has been created in the system (initial status).

select the corresponding status profile here. You cannot make any changes to the document. This value has precedence over the value that the system sets.09. Status Information for Project Element Use On the Status tab page you see a detailed overview of the current status and the threshold values of a project element.2008 Released The document has been released. Threshold Value Violation The system displays the threshold value violations for the project element under Thresh. You can set a manual value for the severity. You can only copy released documents from the document templates to a project. You can change the status of the document to Invalid.SAP Online Help 12. Features You cannot make any changes if you opened a snapshot. The system displays whether the status is a user status or a system status in the Active Statuses table. If you want to use the user status. Status You can change the status. Collaboration Projects 257 . Value Violation.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful